JP7435677B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding benefits to players based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that, when operated, stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position where the symbols are visible through the display section, and A means that can grant benefits corresponding to the results,
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which the first symbol combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode; a second result that enables a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination to be stopped at the predetermined position when the operation is performed in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode; death,
comprising a mode notification means capable of performing mode notification regarding the operation modes including the first operation mode and the second operation mode using a predetermined notification means;
A specific state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed is set,
a grasping means for grasping information corresponding to the number of games played in the specific state;
When a predetermined specific opportunity occurs, information corresponding to the scheduled number of games for which specific processing regarding the mode notification by the mode notification means is to be executed in the specific state is settable in a predetermined specific area. 1 means and
a second means capable of executing the specific processing when the information grasped by the grasping means corresponds to the information set by the first means;
If the scheduled number of games set when the specific opportunity occurs is a first number, a third means capable of executing a first notification based on the specific opportunity;
If the scheduled number of games set when the specific opportunity occurs is a second number, a fourth means capable of executing a second notification based on the specific opportunity;
Equipped with
After the specific trigger occurs, the specific process may be performed in a game with a different number of games than the planned number of games .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state when 3 bets are made. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state when 2 bets are made. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table for bonus states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows advantageous area transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure showing an example of various migration lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows AT type determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows AT start game setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the number table of portent games. It is a flowchart which shows AT addition processing. It is a figure showing an example of an additional lottery table. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows AT start game determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous area transition games. (a) is a flowchart showing the second section display process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the initialization process of advantageous section information. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specific judgment areas. It is a flowchart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for continuous effects. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process corresponding to the number of bets. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display performance and reel performance by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 7 is a timing chart for explaining how the number of games for which specific processing regarding an instruction function is to be executed is set in the determination information storage area. 7 is a timing chart for explaining how the number of games for which specific processing regarding an instruction function is to be executed is set in the determination information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous area transition games in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flow chart which shows AT lottery processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows AT start game setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows AT start game determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specific judgment areas. It is a flowchart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result correspondence processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process for specific judgment areas. It is a flowchart which shows processing for continuous effects. 12 is a timing chart for explaining how specific processing related to an instruction function is avoided. It is a flowchart which shows AT start game determination processing in a 5th embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing specific determination content setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specific judgment areas. It is a flowchart which shows specific determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows specific judgment effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 500-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one revolution. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "Bell" symbol (for example, the 1st on the left reel 32L), the "Replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g. 2nd on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (e.g. 8th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (e.g. 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (for example, the 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" symbol (for example, the 4th on the left reel 32L), "White Shell" symbol (for example, the left There are 10 types (19th on reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated by medal bets are set, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, When winning a prize, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a bonus is given in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6 mentioned above, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where the game is started after three medals are bet, and cases where the game is started when two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bending line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In addition, below, a game that starts with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. The game is also called a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a 1-bet game is not set.

FIGS. 8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 32nd small winning winning.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small winning combination is won. When the first small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stop on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, a second small prize is awarded. When the second small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the player can win a minor prize that is different from the first minor prize winning mentioned above. It is also understandable that the following holds true.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the third small It will be a prize. When the third small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and from the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the player can easily understand that the above-mentioned first minor prize winning or second minor prize winning has been achieved. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize is established, which is different from the above.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fourth small prize is won. When the fourth small winning combination is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the fourth small winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the upward-to-the-right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and from the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the player can easily understand that the above-mentioned 1st minor prize winning to 3rd minor prize winning It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize is established, which is different from the above.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fifth small prize is won. When the fifth small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and from the difference in the lines in which the "bell" symbols are aligned, the player can easily understand that the above-mentioned 1st minor prize winning to 4th minor prize winning It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize is established, which is different from the above.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the sixth small prize is won. When the sixth small winning combination is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 6th small winning combination stops on the active line ML, the "bell" symbol appears in the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in a hill shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the bell has been achieved. It is also possible to understand that small winnings are achieved, which is different from the above.

The “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “red shell” symbol, or “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “white 7” symbol, “white shell” on the right reel 32R If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the active line ML, the seventh small winning combination will be won. When the seventh small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small win corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small prize is won. When the 8th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small prize winning corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and due to the difference in the line in which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned, a small prize winning that is different from the above-mentioned 7th minor prize winning It is also understandable that the following holds true.

The 9th minor role to the 32nd minor role are mainly the so-called missed wins, in which winning is achieved when the first minor role to the 6th minor role are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th small role to the 32nd small role are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, or "bell" on the left reel 32L. The symbols and the "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "Cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, " "Bell" symbol or "White shell" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "White shell" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Aka shell" symbol, "BAR" on the right reel 32R ” symbol or “Replay” symbol, and the winning is established when the corresponding combination stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th minor prize winning to the 32nd minor prize winning are all such that the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on a straight line (L1 to L5). The setting is such that it is easy to understand that there is no small win corresponding to the bell.

Incidentally, in the above configuration in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor winning combinations, the small winning combinations that are paid out are a type of privilege that is given according to the result of the game. In addition, in this specification, the medals that are paid out may also be referred to as balls put out, and the ratio of the number of medals paid out (balls put out) to the number of medals inserted (bet) is also referred to as the ball payout rate. There are cases.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 12th replay win. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of these first to twelfth regames.

In the first replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "White Shell" symbol, or "Young Man" symbol on the right reel 32R, ” When the symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "replay" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a replay winning corresponding to the replay has been achieved.

In the second replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "BAR" symbols are aligned and stop on the upward-rightward line L5, as shown in FIG. 14(a), or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward-rightward line L5. When the second re-game winning is achieved, benefits advantageous to the player may be awarded.

In the third replay, the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line ML. If it stops at the top, a prize is awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the 3rd re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stop on the lower line L3, as shown in FIG. 14(c), or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown, the "Red 7" symbols line up and stop on the downward-sloping line L4. When the third re-game winning is achieved, benefits advantageous to the player may be awarded.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games overlap and win.

The 6th replay consists of a "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "Red 7" symbol, a "White 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol, stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the middle reel 32M, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai-off state. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the lower row of the right reel 32R, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-off state.

The 7th replay is a "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Or, when the "red shell" symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the right reel 32R, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called upper stage Watermelon Tenpai-missing stopping mode. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel 32R. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-tempai stop mode.

The 8th replay consists of a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when and stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the middle line L2.

In the 9th replay, when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay win stops on the active line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the right The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called middle stage replay out-of-temperature stopping pattern.

In the 10th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R A winning is established when the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol stops on the activated line ML. Also, in the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. If the robot stops on the line ML, a prize is won. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game winning or the 12th re-gaming winning stops on the active line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears in the lower row of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you win in the 10th replay or 12th replay, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, if you win in the 10th replay, the "cherry" symbol will stop on the upper row. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, so it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-gaming winning and the 12th re-gaming winning. In the 11th re-game, a prize is established when it is not possible to win a prize in the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, that is, when there is a possibility that the winnings may be missed.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning and a 2nd BB winning.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first BB prize is won. When the first BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a 2nd BB prize is awarded. When the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning stops on the active line ML, the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display window 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output detection signals of LOW signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, there is a first credit input switch 56 for inputting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media out of the prescribed number of coins for the game at a time. is provided. The specific number of coins is set depending on the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of medals for the game is set as 3 and the specific number is set as 3, then 3 virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. If the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of credits is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, the 2 credits will be inserted on condition that there are credits. When virtual medals are inserted and the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number of medals is set as 3, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, If three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, and the specified number is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number is set as 2, then the first When the credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting two virtual medals. Each credit input switch 56, 57 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. It should also be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 and 57 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that this slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The first credit input switch 56 has a larger operation surface that can be operated by the player than the second credit input switch 57, and the first credit input switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit input switch 57. better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally, players would play a game by inserting a specific number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, a performance switch 66 is provided which is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, they can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a press order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a press order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided which has a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. There is. Note that the lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, the lower display section 69 may be provided with operation buttons for presentation, or the entire lower display section 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

The main control device 101 is provided with a winning ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player and those that are not. The role ratio monitor 77 is controlled by the main controller so that it becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, it is installed in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be viewed through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is accommodated. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be seen through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21. It is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77 unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power outage signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which is 12 volts DC in this example, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card A display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via an output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 to secure the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like are connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer update processing is performed to subtract and add the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, payout number display section 62, and instruction monitor 68, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, if a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-play winning is achieved in a 2-bet game, two virtual medals are automatically inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert virtual medals.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the payment switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 and 57 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the prescribed number of coins in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the prescribed number of coins in gaming states other than the bonus state. In other words, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "1", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to step S204 to wait for the start, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that a game start condition has been met, notification of a lottery result in a previous game), and outputs a notification to the speaker 64. and controls the auxiliary display section 65.

After executing the process in step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has been issued. In such a case, in step S208, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 19.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are roughly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and the lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, so the lottery table for the normal gaming state is the same as the lottery table for the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is also set up.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is determined. Select. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state Select a lottery table. If the current game is a 3-bet game, select the normal game state lottery table for 3-bet games (Figure 20), and if the current game is a 2-bet game, select the 2-bet game. Select the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 21). In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on with the setting key detection sensor 73a detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on. It is activated after the initialization process of the RAM 106. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that point is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is ended. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 shows a normal game state lottery table that is selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 shows a normal game state lottery table that is selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65,535, in step S306, a process is executed to set the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning combination winning flag and the eighth minor winning winning flag are set in step S306. Further, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

Note that in step S306 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag has been carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB or 2nd BB has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If the winning flag is not set, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the first BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV = 11, the judgment value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, The winning combination flag and the 13th minor winning flag are set.

In addition, a lottery table with the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag carried over is prepared separately, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 27.3 for setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 for setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the price, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both independent of the setting value. It is approximately 1/26.2. The probability of winning on chance A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1/164, regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning is approximately 1/262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning on chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 16400 minutes regardless of the setting value. 1, and it is set so that chance B is more likely to win than chance C, and chance A is easier to win than chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is approximately 1/107 for setting 1, approximately 1/104 for setting 3, and approximately 93.6 for setting 6. It is set so that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1/215. The probability of winning) is approximately 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and it is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1/504 regardless of the setting value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle order push bell 1, middle order push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning Pincer Bell 2, Reverse Push Bell 1, and Reverse Push Bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is the set value. It is approximately 1/18.4 regardless of the difference. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is approximately 1/107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1/5.03 regardless of the setting value, and other winnings (replay, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) and the 2nd BB (IV=26) cannot be won (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In a 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the first BB is 0. In a situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the first BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) are as follows when playing the above 3 bet game. The probability is the same as the probability if The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1/9.64 regardless of the setting value, making it easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so that they cannot be won in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that it is more difficult to win than when playing a 3-bet game. has been done. In the 2-bet game, settings are made so that a duplicate 1-card hand (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is approximately 1/1.81 regardless of the setting value. In addition, in the 2-bet game, it is set so that the first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but it is set so that it is possible to win the second BB (IV = 26), and the probability of winning is regardless of the setting value. It is approximately 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the second BB is 0. In a situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. By the way, in a 2-bet game, excluding the increase in the second BB, a decrease of about 0.64 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set stoppable symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV = 11), and the 1st small role winning flag, 9th small role winning flag, 10th small role winning flag, and 13th small role winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st minor prize, 9th minor prize, 10th minor prize, and 13th minor prize can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the 7th minor role winning flag and the 8th minor role winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor role winning and the 8th minor role winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that it can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1st BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the 1st BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the first BB winning). In addition, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3 bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (stop symbol information is set to avoid the second BB winning).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small role win and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority and the bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be achieved. . When winning a re-game and a bonus, the priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

For example, in a situation where you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning has been carried over), you also win a watermelon, and the 1st BB prize, the 7th minor prize, and If the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor role winning is set, the priority order is set so that the 7th minor role winning and the 8th minor role winning are established with priority over the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in a situation where you have won the 2nd BB (a situation where the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning has been carried over), you can also win the regular reply A, win the 2nd BB, and win the 1st replay. , if the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-gaming, 3rd re-gaming, and 4th re-gaming winnings is set, each re-gaming winning is given priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set the ranking.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the hand ratio monitor 77, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310, etc., to perform a performance using reel control during the invalid period. It is processing. The rotation effect processing will be explained in detail later. In the following step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and then ends the rotation start process. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, there is a stop mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when a bell is won in the order of pressing (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates the stop command A second stop information setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations in steps 44 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle order push bell 1 is won, each of the stop switches 42 to 44 will change from left to middle to right, left to right to middle, middle to right to left, right to left to middle, or right to right. The stop information is set so that when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the 17th minor role winning, 18th minor role winning, or 21st minor role winning is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the 17th small role win, the 18th small role win, or the 21st minor role win.

The 17th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Furthermore, the 18th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red shell" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The 21st small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the left reel 32L, these 17th small role symbols, 18th small role symbols, and 21st minor role symbols are arranged such that the spacing between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, regardless of the timing of the operation, either the 17th small role symbol, the 18th minor role symbol, or the 21st minor role symbol is placed on the active line (middle row). Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbol with a small number of sliding pieces on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 21st small role symbol, the 5th "Replay" symbol (3-panel Beri), in the middle row, and the 4th "Akakai" symbol, which has the smallest number of sliding symbols, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the left reel 32L stops. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor role winning to be achieved, the 17th minor role winning and the 21st minor role winning will not be realized.

When the 18th small winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the stop information is changed in the second stop information setting process so that the 18th small winning combination can be achieved.

The 18th small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "Replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper row of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th small role symbols on the right reel 32R are the "white shellfish" symbol and the "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "Shirakai" symbol or "Young man" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination will be won, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it cannot be stopped in the upper row, a so-called loss will occur. becomes.

Here, when the "Ark Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, it means that you win the middle order push bell 1 as described above and the 18th small In addition to cases where there is a possibility of winning a winning combination, there are also cases where there is a possibility of winning the middle order push bell 2 and winning the 20th small winning combination. That is, the 20th small role symbol in the middle order push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M common to the 18th small role symbol. In the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol, while the 20th minor symbol is a "red 7" symbol and a "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol and the 20th small role symbol can be changed to the 20th minor role symbol by operating the right stop switch 44 at a timing that can stop the 18th minor role symbol on the active line. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 20th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line and the 20th small role symbol can be stopped on the active line, the 18th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Each of these designs is arranged on the . Therefore, assuming that you do not know whether you have won the middle order push bell 1 or the middle order push bell 2, you can stop the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and win the 18th small prize. Even if the 20th minor winning combination is in a stopped state where there is a possibility of winning, it is not possible to aim for it and win the prize.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "Replay" symbols, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red shell" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between these symbols is 4 or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle order push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the 3rd small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation. do.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation, the first minor prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the 2nd minor role winning, the 3rd minor role winning, the 4th minor role winning, the 5th minor role winning, or the 6th minor role winning is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, then Depending on the operation timing, other small winning combinations will be won, or none of the small winning combinations will be achieved and the winnings will be missed. By the way, if you win a common bell, you will win the 1st minor role, the 2nd minor role, the 3rd minor role, the 4th minor role, and the 5th minor role, regardless of the operation order and timing. , or the 6th small role prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a bonus status process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After executing the bonus status process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S415. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result, etc. is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S417, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first to twelfth re-game wins has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If any re-play winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any re-play winnings have been achieved, a re-play setting process is performed to set the gaming mode to re-play mode. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming mode is the re-gaming mode, automatic input processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a first BB state or a second BB state. Whether the state is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. Identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state process is immediately terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S503.

In step S503, processing is performed to input 3 into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit input switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are input. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of coins for the game, in a situation where the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to 2 or 3, operating the second credit input switch 57 It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. Note that if 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved. If any BB winnings have not been achieved, the bonus state processing is immediately terminated. If any BB winning has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning has been achieved.

If the first BB winning is established, in step S506, a process is executed to input "15" into the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB status flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination will be made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command recognizes that the first BB state is started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the first BB start effect is performed. In addition, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can recognize that the next game will be in the first BB state, and the display control device 81 can use the speakers 64 and the like to perform the effects for the first BB state from the next game. Controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

Note that the initial values of the prescribed bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB winning has not been achieved is the case where the second BB winning has been achieved. In this case, the process advances to step S511, and a process of inputting "15" into the BB counter described above is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. Thereafter, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game, The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the presentation for the 2BB state is performed. Note that the first BB start performance and the second BB start performance are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can identify them. Furthermore, the appearance and content of the first BB state performance and the second BB state performance are different to the extent that the player can distinguish them. The processing on the display control device 81 side when receiving the first BB start command or the second BB start command will be described in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, a process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. That is, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515, and processing in the first BB state or the second BB state is performed. FIG. 25 shows an example of a BB state lottery table. Note that in this embodiment, a common lottery table is used in the first BB state and the second BB state, but separate lottery tables are provided for each, and the types of winning roles and the probability of winning for each role are different. It's okay. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, settings are made so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won in the first BB state and the second BB state. The probability of winning a normal reply A (probability of winning when IV=1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/61.2. The probability of winning a duplicate one-card combination (the probability of winning when IV=24) is approximately 1/5.96. Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of a losing result in which neither winning combination is won is approximately 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00 medals), and no increase or decrease in medals will occur in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although an increase in medals cannot be expected in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal playing state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main reason for the increase in medals is the 1st minor prize winning to the 6th minor prize winning in which 13 coins are paid out. The winning combination is the push order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor prizes, in the normal gaming state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a fixed order, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the setting is such that winning is more likely to occur in the first BB state than in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the normal gaming state in a 2-bet game and the 2nd BB state that can be transitioned to in a 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal gaming state, the probability is about 1/9.64 In contrast, in the 2nd BB state, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 5.96, and even in 2-bet games, winnings are more likely to occur in the 2nd BB state than in the normal gaming state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you use the first BB state or the second BB state.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any of the small winning combinations has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table and each reel control. If a winning has not been achieved, the bonus state processing is immediately terminated. If a winning is established, in step S516, a process is executed to subtract the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if the common bell is won and the first to sixth minor winning combinations are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so 13 is subtracted from the BB counter in step S516.

If it is determined in step S517 that the number is not less than 0, the bonus state processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process is performed to clear the BB status flag corresponding to the current BB status. That is, if it is in the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is in the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 into the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, when terminating the first BB state, the first BB end command is set to be output, and when the second BB state is ended, the second BB end command is set to be output. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed. The processing on the display control device 81 side when receiving the first BB end command or the second BB end command will be described in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S521, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, and then the present bonus state processing is ended. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are input, and the 2-bet game The game will be played at. In other words, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the 2-bet game is likely to be played. By the way, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so you cannot bet 3 by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57, In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45.

Here, the gameplay using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game in the slot machine 10 will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 26.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is winning is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, if 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, it becomes a 2 bet game.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, you can win the first BB but not the second BB, and in a 2-bet game, you can win the second BB but not the first BB. In a game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated as described above, the second BB can basically be won in a two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won, but no prize is won in the winning game, an internal state (carryover state) occurs in which the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, if 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, it becomes a 3 bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the 1st BB is won, the 1st BB winning can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but each reel is set so that the 1st BB winning cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Stop control is performed for 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the internal state where the 2nd BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the 2nd BB winning cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the 2nd BB winning can be achieved in a 2-bet game. It will be done. In other words, if you win the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if you continue playing the 3-bet game, you can win the 1st BB, but if you switch to the 2-bet game after winning the 1BB, you can win the 1st BB. cannot be established. Also, if you win the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if you continue playing the 2-bet game, you can win the 2nd BB, but if you switch to the 3-bet game after winning the 2nd BB, you can win the 2nd BB. cannot be established. Then, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB will not be won twice, and the 1st BB will not be won again in a situation where the 1st BB winning has been carried over, and the 2nd BB will not be won twice. Also, in a situation where the 2nd BB winning has been carried over, you will not be able to win the 2nd BB again, and you will not be able to win the 1st BB twice. In other words, if you play the 2-bet game when you win the 1st BB, you will continue playing in the internal state where the 1st BB win is carried over, and if you win the 2nd BB, you will play the 3-bet game. Then, the game continues endlessly in the internal state in which the second BB win is carried over.

Here, as mentioned above, since the 1st BB winning is made to occur only in 3-bet games, and the 2nd BB winning is made to be made only in 2-bet games, the 3rd BB winning in a situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over Even if you end up with a losing result in which you do not win any role in a bet game, the 2nd BB won will not be established, and if you end up losing in a 2 bet game where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even if it is, the 1st BB prize will not be established. By doing this, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning structure and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that a 2nd BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, or a 1st BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game, the internal state that carries over the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win If you want to continue winning, it will be necessary to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing result, and for example, in a winning combination that may be missed, it will be necessary to win another winning combination when the winning result is missed.

Furthermore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main winning combination that increases medals is the common bell. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the main role that increases medals in a 2-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role that increases medals in a 3-bet game is the push order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations will be won regardless of the operating order and timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas the pressing order bell , the winning small winning combinations differ depending on the operating order and operating timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the amplitude of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and internal state in a 3-bet game than in the 1st BB state and 2nd BB state. is big. Then, for example, when the push order bell is won, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) assists in winning by notifying the operation order (Fig. 25) from the 1st minor prize winning to the 6th minor prize winning. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is also possible to create a state in which the number of medals increases and a state in which the number of medals decreases depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

The basic flow of the game in which the first credit input switch 56 is operated is that a 2-bet game is first played in a non-internal state, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, an internal state is entered and the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game continues in a state in which the winning second BB cannot be established. In this case, as mentioned above, in a 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, there is no winning in the 1st BB, there is no winning in the 2nd BB, and the game is played in an internal state where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. It will be continued.

Hereinafter, assuming that the game is played with the 2nd BB winning carried over, we will explain the gameplay using the notification when the push order bell is won (press order notification), etc. in that game (in the following explanation, also referred to as the normal game). explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. The lottery result handling process is a process that is performed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery to shift to the AT mode in which press order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process is executed to determine the number of bets for the game to be started this time. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in either BB state. conduct. If it is not the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether the number of bets is 3 or not. If the game is in the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3, In this state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether the number of bets in the current game is a specific specified number (specific setting number) that is specified (set) in association with the gaming state. If the specified specified number does not exist, the lottery result handling process is ended without performing the display mode process (instruction function process) after step S604.

That is, in a non-internal state or an internal state, processing for display mode is executed in a 3-bet game, while processing for display mode is not executed in a 2-bet game. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets, the 2-bet game is not executed, and the processing for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous for the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play a 3-bet game and make it easier to play a normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding the occurrence of press order notification, etc., an advantageous section where press order notification etc. can occur and a normal section where it cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section, and in this case, an advantageous section transfer lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result corresponding process is ended.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, an advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous section transfer lottery table, the transfer rate to the advantageous section (probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, the triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section are normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance item A, chance item B, chance item C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for advantageous section transition lottery, dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used, and the dedicated counters are updated at a predetermined period, and in step S703, the latest updated value of the counters is acquired. Then, in step S704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that no matter which trigger is used, there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S701 is the trigger for the transfer lottery (not a losing result), it is possible to omit the processing in steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, then in step S706 a process is executed to set an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is a game in which a lottery for moving to an advantageous section has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after executing the process in step S706, the advantageous section transition lottery process is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process advances to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether any one of the precursor flag, the first AT mode flag, and the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in this embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set as AT modes with different additional winning probabilities, and the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag indicate that it is an AT mode and its type. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp, and is set when transitioning to AT mode. Further, the precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery and that the shift to AT mode has been confirmed, and that the situation is before the shift to AT mode. . If neither flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter that causes a transition to AT mode (without winning) regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not (without winning) when the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling number of games. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the ceiling number of games. The ceiling number of games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as mentioned above, since the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state, the ceiling counter is executed when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state. It is subtracted in some games, but not in 2-bet games, for example.

After executing the ceiling counter subtraction process in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether the ceiling counter has reached 0. If the number has not reached 0, processing for AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S810.

That is, in step S803, a process for understanding the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities for the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set in the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to understand.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S804, then in step S805 a process is executed to obtain a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, it is determined in step S806 whether or not a CZ end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ end flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the CZ mode has not yet been ended, although the conditions for ending the CZ mode have already been met. If the CZ end flag is set, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag and the CZ end flag is executed in step S807, and then the process of acquiring the normal AT mode transition lottery table is executed in step S805. do. If the CZ end flag is not set, a process for acquiring a CZ AT mode transition lottery table is executed in step S808.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, there is a 1% probability of winning the AT mode transition for normal games, a 3% probability of AT mode transition winning for CZ, etc. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery table than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are set so that the AT mode transition cannot be won for normal use, while the AT mode transition can be won for CZ use.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S805 or step S808, the AT mode transition lottery process is performed in step S809 using the acquired transition lottery table and the game lottery results grasped in step S803. Execute. Then, in step S810, it is determined whether or not the transition to AT mode has been won.

If it is determined in step S810 that the transition to AT mode has been won, and if it is determined in step S802 that the ceiling counter is 0, processing for winning the AT mode in steps S811 to S817 is executed. Further, if it is determined in step S810 that the transition to AT mode has not been won, processing for not winning the AT mode is executed in steps S818 to S824.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step S811, an AT type determination process is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are provided as AT modes with different additional winning probabilities, and the AT type determination process in step S811 determines that the current AT mode is the first AT mode. This is a process for determining whether to use the AT mode or the second AT mode.

<AT type determination process>
Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, in step S901, an AT type lottery process is executed. In the AT type lottery process, for example, depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of increased medals during the advantageous period, the number of games during the advantageous period, etc., or randomly. The current AT mode type will be determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting value is set for the ball output rate, the easier it is to select the second AT mode, which is easier to add, and if the previous AT mode was the first AT mode, This time, the 2nd AT mode may be made easier to select, and although the 2nd AT mode is normally difficult to select, once the 2nd AT mode is selected, the 2nd AT mode may be made easier to select in the next AT mode. Alternatively, the second AT mode may be more likely to be selected in a scene where the number of increased medals or the number of games is small at the beginning of an advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the process result of step S901 is the first AT mode. If the mode is the first AT mode, the process of setting the first AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S903, and the process of setting the first AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S904. Then, this AT type determination process ends. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the situation is before transition to the first AT mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side when receiving the first AT command will be described in detail later.

If it is the second AT mode in step S902, a process of setting a second AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S905, and a second AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S906. After executing the process, this AT type determination process ends. The second AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the situation is before transition to the second AT mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side when receiving the second AT command will be described in detail later.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT type determination process is executed in step S811, the AT start game setting process is executed in step S812. In this embodiment, after the transition to AT mode is confirmed, the transition to AT mode is performed after playing a precursor game, and the AT start game setting process sets the number of precursor games until transition to AT mode. It is processing. Note that in the precursor game before shifting to the AT mode, a continuous display is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like as a suggestive display suggesting that the AT mode shift lottery has been won.

<AT start game setting process>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, in the AT start game setting process, in step S1001, it is determined whether the current AT mode shift winning is triggered by reaching the ceiling game. More specifically, if the ceiling counter is 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001. If the AT mode transition is won by reaching the ceiling game, in step S1002, a process of acquiring a ceiling precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed. If it is determined in step S1001 that reaching the ceiling game is not the trigger, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the transition to the AT mode during the CZ mode has been won. More specifically, if the CZ mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1003. If the transition to AT mode is not in CZ mode but in normal mode, in step S1004, a normal precursor game number table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a.

When comparing the ceiling number of portent games table and the normal portent game number table, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the number of precursor games is likely to be shorter than the number of precursor games selected in , and specifically, if it is for the ceiling, the number of precursor games from 1 game to 5 games is selected, For normal use, the number of precursory games is set to be selected from 5 to 10 games.

After obtaining the precursor game number table in step S1002 or step S1004, a precursor game number lottery process is executed in step S1005, and the current number of precursor games is determined by lottery. In the following step S1006, processing is executed to determine the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous section. The number of games after moving to the advantageous section can be grasped by the number of games AG in the advantageous section provided in various counter areas 106e. Counting of the number of games in the advantageous section AG starts when the game shifts to the advantageous section, and is incremented by 1 each time one game is played in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1007, the number of precursor games determined by lottery in step S1005 is added to the current number of advantageous section games AG, and the value is used for the AT start determination provided in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. Executes the process of inputting into the area. In this embodiment, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the value input to the AT start determination area, the transition to the AT mode is permitted, and the processing in step S1007 is an advantageous period in which the AT mode start processing is performed. This can be said to be a process for setting the game during the section. For example, if the number of games after moving to the advantageous section is 50, and the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process for the number of precursor games is 8, 58 is input to the AT start determination area, and the number of games in the advantageous zone is 8. When AG reaches 58, transition to AT mode is permitted.

By the way, the initial setting value set in the AT start determination area after the initialization processing of the RAM 106 and the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section is 1501, and the number of games is set to be larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. .

If it is determined in step S1003 that the transition to the AT mode in the CZ mode has been won, then in step S1008, a process is executed in which the remaining number of games in the CZ mode is determined by a CZ counter. The CZ counter is a counter to which a value (10) corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the CZ mode is input upon transition to the CZ mode, and is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played in the CZ mode. In step S1009, similarly to step S1006, a process of grasping the number of advantageous section games AG is executed. Then, in step S1010, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode grasped in step S1008 is set as the number of precursor games, the number of precursor games is added to the current number of advantageous zone games AG, and the value is set in the AT start determination area. Execute the input process. Similarly to step S1007, the process in step S1010 also corresponds to the process of setting a game in an advantageous period in which the AT mode start process is performed. For example, if the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is 50 and the number of remaining games in CZ mode is 8, 58 is input to the AT start determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 58, AT mode will be allowed.

After setting the game for starting the AT mode in step S1007 or step S1010, a process of setting a precursor flag is executed in step S1011. Then, in step S1012, a process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT start game setting process ends. The precursor command includes information on the number of precursor games. Note that the processing on the display control device 81 side when a precursor command is received will be described in detail later.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT start game setting process is executed in step S812, it is determined in step S813 whether the CZ mode flag is set. If it is set, a process to clear the CZ mode flag is executed in step S814. If a negative determination is made in step S813, or after executing the process in step S814, processes for specialized zones are executed in steps S815 to S817. The specialized zone is a mode in which the number of AT mode games is likely to be increased.

That is, in step S815, a process is executed to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section AG, and in step S816, the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is stored in the specialization end determination area provided in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. Execute the process of inputting the value obtained by adding 10. Then, in step S817, a process for setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the present AT lottery process is ended. In this embodiment, the specialized zone is configured to end when the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches the value input in the specialization end determination area, and the processing in step S816 is performed in the advantageous zone in which the specialization zone termination process is performed. This can be said to be the process of setting up the game inside. For example, when the number of games after moving to the advantageous zone is 50, 60 is input into the specialization end determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous zone reaches 60, the specialization zone ends.

By the way, the initial setting value set in the specialization end judgment area after the initialization process of the RAM 106 and the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period is 1501, and the number of games larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous period is set. Ru.

If it is determined in step S810 that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, it is determined in step S818 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is immediately ended. If the CZ mode flag is not set, processing for transition to the CZ mode is executed in steps S819 to S824.

That is, in step S819, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, a CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the CZ mode using the game lottery results grasped in step S803. . As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game.More specifically, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set. It is set so that the easier the lottery result of the game is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode shift lottery. In other words, even if the lottery result of a game makes it easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, if you do not win the AT mode transition lottery, the settings are set so that it is easier to transition to the CZ mode. There is.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery process in step S819, it is determined in step S820 whether the CZ mode transition has been won, and if the transition has not been won, the AT lottery process is directly ended. If the CZ mode shift is won, a process is executed to grasp the number of advantageous zone games AG in step S821, and in step S822, the current state is stored in the CZ end determination area provided in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. A process of inputting a value obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is executed. Then, in step S823, a process is executed to set the CZ mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S824, a process is executed to set the CZ command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the main The AT lottery process ends. In this embodiment, the CZ mode is configured to end when the number of games in the advantageous period AG reaches the value input in the CZ end determination area, and the process of step S822 is for the games in the advantageous period in which the CZ mode ending process is performed. This can be said to be the process of setting. For example, if the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is 50, 60 is input into the CZ end determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 60, the CZ mode ends.

By the way, the initial setting value set in the CZ end determination area after the initialization process of the RAM 106 and the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is 1501, and the number of games is set larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. .

<AT addition processing>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when the precursor flag or any AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding on the number of consecutive AT mode games.

In the AT addition processing, first, in step S1101, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1102, it is determined whether the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialized zone flag is not set, it is determined in step S1103 whether the first AT flag or the first AT mode flag is set. If the first AT flag or the first AT mode flag is set and the transition to the first AT mode is confirmed or the first AT mode is in progress, in step S1104, the first AT flag is set from the various table storage areas 105a. Execute the process to obtain the bonus lottery table. On the other hand, if the first AT flag or the first AT mode flag is not set in step S1103 and the transition to the second AT mode is confirmed or the second AT mode is in progress, the second AT mode is set in step S1105. Execute the process to obtain the bonus lottery table. Further, if the specialization zone flag is set in step S1101, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not a specialization end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialization end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the specialization zone has not yet been ended, although the specialization zone end conditions have already been met. If the specialization end flag is set, the specialization zone flag and the specialization end flag are cleared in step S1107, and then the additional lottery table for each AT is cleared in steps S1103 to S1105. Perform the processing to obtain. If the specialization end flag is not set in step S1106, a process of acquiring a specialization zone additional lottery table is executed in step S1108.

As shown in FIG. 35, each additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. For example, chance item C is easier to win an additional prize than chance item A, and cherry A It is set so that the less likely it is to win in the lottery process of each game, the more likely it is to win the additional lottery, such as Cherry C being more likely to win the additional lottery. In addition, when comparing the same lottery results, it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for 2nd AT than when using the additional lottery table for 1st AT, and furthermore, when using the additional lottery table for 2nd AT, it is easier to win the additional lottery. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the special zone additional lottery table than when using the special zone additional lottery table.

After obtaining the additional lottery table in step S1104, step S1105, or step S1108, the additional lottery is executed in step S1109, and it is determined in step S1110 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the player does not win the add-on lottery, the AT add-on process is immediately terminated. If the player wins the add-on lottery, an add-on game number lottery process is executed in step S1111. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the current number of add-on games is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 35, the number of add-on games table is set such that the number of add-on games is different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. For example, the add-on game is usually triggered by reply A. In this case, an average of 150 games will be added to the lottery, while if Cherry A is the trigger, an average of 15 games will be added.For example, when it is difficult to win the bonus lottery, the addition is made at an opportunity. The number of additional games is set to be larger in the case.

After executing the lottery process for the number of add-on games in step S1111, the process of adding the current number of add-on games to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1112. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the AT mode. After executing the process in step S1112, in step S1113, a process is executed to set the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT addition process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing an add-on notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 corresponding to the fact that the add-on has been performed.

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S607 or step S608 is executed, the process for notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the process for press order notification executed in steps S609 to S612, an overview of the press order notification executed on the instruction monitor 68 and the press order notification effect executed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be given. I will explain about it. Note that the press order notification and press order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, press order navigation, order notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 notifies you of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs a pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. 36(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 36(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments. Segment N7 is arranged so that it can display at least the numbers "1" to "6". Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally at the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 may be arbitrary, and it is even possible to display seven segments instead of eight segments. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game where the start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that transitions to an advantageous section and a press order notification can occur is established. . Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

In other words, the section in which it is easier for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by being more easily notified of the order of operations such as the push order bell, etc. is defined as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is as follows: In the advantageous section, the light will turn on during a specific section where you can actually benefit from push order notification, and it will turn off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section. This serves as a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, or in other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position that is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is placed near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher for the eighth display segment N8 than for the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance for the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Next, the press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification, the press order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R until the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by having a configuration in which the press order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are activated. This allows the game to proceed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the press order in steps S609 to S612 will be explained.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S610 whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, an instruction is given in step S611 to notify the pressing order corresponding to the 1st minor prize winning to the 6th minor prize winning according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Controls monitor 68. Then, in step S612, after executing a process of setting a push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations as an output target to the display control device 81. , the main press order notification process ends. The display control device 81 that receives this press order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the press order notification effects corresponding to the first minor winning combination to the sixth minor winning combination are performed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is immediately terminated.

<Winning result processing>
Next, the winning result handling process carried out in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. In the winning result corresponding process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed depending on the game result.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in either BB state. conduct. If it is not the BB state, it is determined in step S1202 whether the number of bets is 3 or not. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1203 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. That is, the processing from step S1201 to step S1203 corresponds to the processing from step S601 to step S603 described above, and it is determined whether or not the specified number is one specified in association with the gaming state. It is processing. If it is not the specified specified number, the winning result corresponding process is ended without performing the display mode process (instruction function process) after step S1204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 or step S1203, and the number of bets is the specified number, the process advances to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that the transition to AT mode has not yet occurred after winning the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, AT start game determination processing is executed in step S1205. The AT start game determination process is a process for executing a specific process regarding the instruction function using information stored in the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106.

<AT start game determination process>
In the AT start game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S1301, the number of advantageous zone games AG and the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f are checked, and the current advantageous zone game is checked. It is determined whether the number AG is greater than or equal to the value (number of games) set in the AT start determination area. If the number of advantageous section games AG is greater than or equal to the value of the AT start determination area, it is determined that the game is a game in which AT mode start processing is performed, and steps S1302 to S1309 are performed. On the other hand, if the number of advantageous section games AG is less than the value in the AT start determination area, the AT start game determination process is immediately terminated.

In step S1302, processing for clearing the precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S1303, a process of adding "50" to the AT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, the initial number of games is 50, regardless of whether the AT mode to be transitioned to is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. It is set up as a game.

After executing the process of step S1303, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the first AT flag is set, and if it is set, the process of clearing the first AT flag is executed in step S1305. do. Then, in step S1306, a process of setting the first AT mode flag is executed. The case where the first AT flag is not set in step S1304 means the case where the second AT flag is set, and in this case, the process of clearing the second AT flag is executed in step S1307. Then, in step S1308, a process of setting a second AT mode flag is executed.

After executing the process of step S1306 or step S1308, in step S1309, a process of setting an AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT start game determination process is ended. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT start command will be described in detail later.

In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1204, or after executing the process in step S1205, it is determined in step S1206 whether any AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, processing for ending the AT mode is executed in steps S1207 to S1211.

That is, in step S1207, the AT counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the AT counter has reached 0. If it has become 0, a process of clearing the corresponding AT mode flag is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, processing is executed to set an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode has ended. Thereafter, in step S1211, processing is executed to set the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the winning result corresponding processing is ended. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the AT termination command will be described in detail later. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1206, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1208, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, a first section display process and a second section display process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, moving it to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be explained.

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be explained with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case in a specific section of the advantageous section in which at least a notification condition that can generate press order notification is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1401 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won in the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that this is the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, processing for clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1404. Then, in step S1405, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1406, processing is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, to start measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section in various counter areas 106e. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to a means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1407, advantageous section transition game processing is executed.

<Advantageous section transition game processing>
In the process for the advantageous section transition game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, in step S1501, a process of acquiring a ceiling table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed. In the ceiling table, for example, the selection rate of each game is set with a lower limit of 100 and an upper limit of 999 as the number of ceiling games. Highly selected games such as 800, 999, which are easily selected in units of about 100 games, and 101-199, 201-299, 301-399, 401-499, 501-599, 601-699, 701-799, 801-899, The number of selected games is set to be low, such as 901 to 998, which are difficult to select. Note that the number of games that are not selected may be included between the lower limit value and the upper limit value. Moreover, the lower limit value and the upper limit value are only examples, and the lower limit value may be smaller than the lower limit value, and the upper limit value may be larger than the lower limit value. The selection rate for each game may be configured to differ depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process.

In step S1502, based on the ceiling table acquired in step S1501, the number of ceiling games to be shifted to the AT mode without winning the AT mode shift lottery is determined by lottery in the advantageous section to which the current shift is to be made. Then, in step S1503, a process is executed to input the processing result of step S1502 into the ceiling counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, and in step S1504, a ceiling command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After executing the process, the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. As described above, the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is played in the AT lottery process. Further, the processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the ceiling command will be described in detail later.

In the first section display process, after the advantageous section transition game process is executed in step S1407, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in step S1408 to start displaying the section display.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, then in step S1409 a process is executed to continue displaying the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1409, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. That is, the process for terminating the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the advantageous section flag is set, after executing the display start process in step S1408 or after executing the display continuation process in step S1409, in step S1410 any AT Determine whether the mode flag is set. In the case where it is determined in step S1410 that none of the AT mode flags is set, and in the case where it is determined in step S1403 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, in step S1411, A process of adding 1 to the first hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1410 that any AT mode flag is set, then in step S1412 a process of adding 1 to the second hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The second hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process in step S1411 or step S1412, a win ratio calculation process is executed in step S1413. In this process, the value of the second hand ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first hand ratio counter and the second hand ratio counter. That is, the winning ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1414, processing is executed to display the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1413 on the winning ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the hand ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. There is. The display segments in the first display section 77a to fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources can be controlled to turn on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, each of the role ratio monitors 77 can individually display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display 5-digit numbers. There is.

In step S1414, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1413 is output to the winning ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e on the winning ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 decimal places, such as "0.5012". The numbers are displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. After executing the process in step S1414, the first section display process ends.

Note that the display control of the winning ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit after the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1413. In addition, since the first display section 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display section 77a may not be provided, or the first display section 77a may be printed, etc. The configuration may be such that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that a decimal point is displayed by printing or the like between the first display section 77a and the second display section 77b.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42(a). As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning results are performed. etc. (winning result corresponding processing) is carried out.

In step S1601, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it has not been set, the second section display process ends. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1602, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the number of precursor games until the start of AT mode is determined, and the value obtained by adding the number of precursor games and the number of advantageous zone games AG is determined as AT. Set in the start judgment area. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the AT start determination area, processing for starting the AT mode is performed. In this case, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is incremented by 1 in the second section display process, as described above, and the addition process for the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state. It is executed regardless of whether it is or not. Therefore, for example, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, even if the precursor game is played as a 2-bet game or played in the BB state, the number of advantageous section games AG is added, and the number of advantageous section games is By playing a game in which AG is greater than or equal to the value of the AT start determination area with a bet of a specified number, processing for starting the AT mode will be performed. By doing this, for example, the display control device 81 performs an effect for the game in which the AT mode is to be started, according to the number of precursor games that is set based on winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the precursor game is played with a bet number other than the specified number, the AT mode start game on the main control device 101 side and the AT mode start game on the display control device 81 side. The display control device 81 handles the occurrence of a discrepancy with the mode starting game by processing a game with a bet number that is not the specified specified number (for example, starting the AT mode for the number of games in the presentation). This can be suitably avoided without performing any processing to delay the game.

After executing the process in step S1602, in step S1603, a process is executed to update the number of increase/decrease tickets MY (MY counter) in advantageous sections provided in various counter areas 106e.

In the MY update process in step S1603, the number of coins inserted (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of the subtraction is calculated as the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize. The advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is updated by adding the number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1603, a remaining game number management process is executed in step S1604, and a remaining game number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1605. The remaining number of games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games, based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. be. In the remaining games management process, for example, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games played in the advantageous section) and the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Understand what If such a situation exists, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number of coins management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 coins) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. It is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in AT mode and the current increase/decrease number MY in the advantageous section is greater than the increase/decrease number in the advantage section. Understand whether there are many situations. If such a situation exists, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1606, specific determination area processing is executed. The specific determination area processing is a process for executing specific processing regarding the instruction function using various information stored in each area of the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106.

<Specific judgment area processing>
In the specific determination area processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, in step S1701, it is determined whether a precursor flag is set. If the precursor flag is set, in step S1702, the number of advantageous section games AG and the AT start judgment area in the judgment information storage area 106f are checked, and the current number of advantageous section games AG is set in the AT start judgment area. It is determined whether the number of games has reached the set number of games.

Here, in the second section display process, the process of adding the number of advantageous section games AG (step S1602) is executed before the process for the specific determination area, and the process for starting the AT mode is executed. , is executed at a timing before the addition process of the number of advantageous section games AG during one game. Therefore, the number of games in which the number of advantageous section games AG is set in the AT start determination area in step S1702. , it means that if the next game after the game is played with a specified number of bets depending on the gaming status, the process for starting AT mode will be performed in the next game. do. In other words, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games in the AT start determination area in step S1702, it means that the game is the previous game to the game in which the AT mode is to be started. In this case, in step S1703, a process of setting an AT pre-winning game flag is executed. In this embodiment, in accordance with the number of precursor games set based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, the display control device 81 performs an effect for the game in which the AT mode is to be started, and also displays the relevant display. In accordance with the performance on the control device 81 side, the main control device 101 side is also configured to perform a performance for the game in which the AT mode is started. More specifically, in a game where the number of advantageous section games AG is the value of the AT start determination area, the AT mode shift winning is announced as a rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The AT pre-win game flag set in step S1703 is a flag for notifying the winning of AT mode transition by the rotation performance.

Here, as described above, the second section display process is set to execute each process regardless of whether or not the game is a game with a specific prescribed number of bets, and the process of step S1702 is also , is executed regardless of whether the game is a game with a specified number of bets or not. In other words, the information regarding the number of games in which the AT mode start process is executed as the specific process related to the instruction function stored in the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f is determined by the number of games in which the AT mode start process is executed as the specific process related to the instruction function, which is stored in the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f. The configuration is such that the CPU 102 can be accessed in a game where the number of bets is different from the specific prescribed number.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701 or step S1702, or after executing the process in step S1703, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, in step S1705, the number of advantageous section games AG and the CZ end judgment area in the judgment information storage area 106f are checked, and the current number of advantageous section games AG is determined as the CZ end judgment. It is determined whether the number of games set in the area is reached. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games in the CZ end determination area, it is assumed that the CZ mode end condition is satisfied in the next game, and the game flag before CZ end is set in step S1706, and the flag is set in step S1707. Execute processing to set the CZ end flag. The CZ before end game flag is used to notify that the CZ mode will end without winning the AT mode transition lottery as a rotation performance of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, as already explained, the CZ end flag is referenced when acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in the AT lottery process, and on the condition that the CZ end flag is set, the CZ mode flag and the CZ end flag are It is cleared and the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired.

That is, the CZ end flag set in step S1707 indicates that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games in the CZ end determination area, and the CPU 102 selects a game for which processing for ending the CZ mode is to be performed as a process for specifying the instruction function. This is a flag that allows you to understand. In addition, like the process for starting AT mode, the process for ending CZ mode is also performed after determining that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has become equal to or greater than the number of games in the CZ end determination area in the process for AT lottery. , a configuration may be adopted in which processing for ending the CZ mode is performed. In any case, in a game in which the number of advantageous section games AG corresponds to the information stored in the judgment information storage area 106f, and the number of bets is a specified specified number, as a specific process related to the instruction function. It is only necessary that the CPU 102 be able to grasp that the CZ termination process should be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1707, the process advances to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialization zone flag is set, in step S1709, the number of advantageous zone games AG and the specialization end determination area in the determination information storage area 106f are checked, and the current number of advantageous zone games AG is determined by the specialization end determination area. It is determined whether the number of games has reached the number of games set in the game completion determination area. If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is the number of games in the specialization end determination area, it is determined that the specialization zone end condition is satisfied in the next game, and a specialization end game flag is set in step S1710. As already explained, the specialization end flag is referenced when acquiring the add-on lottery table in the AT add-on process, and on the condition that the specialization end flag is set, the specialization zone flag and specialization end flag are This is cleared, and the additional lottery table corresponding to each AT mode is acquired. That is, the specialization end flag set in step S1710 indicates that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is the number of games in the specialization end determination area, and that the specialization zone end processing should be performed as a process for specifying the instruction function. This is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand the game. In addition, like the process for starting AT mode, for the process for ending the specialization zone, in the process for adding AT, it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the number of games in the specialization end determination area. It is also possible to perform a process for terminating the specialized zone. In any case, in a game where the number of advantageous section games AG corresponds to the information stored in the judgment information storage area 106f, and the number of bets is a specified specified number, as a specific process related to the instruction function. It is only necessary that the CPU 102 be able to grasp that the process for ending the specialized zone should be executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1708 or step S1709, or after executing the process in step S1710, the specific determination area process ends.

In the second section display process, after executing the process for the specific determination area in step S1606, in step S1607, it is determined whether the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, 1500, or whether the number of games in the advantageous section It is determined whether the increase/decrease number MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the number of games AG in the advantageous section and the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section are cleared to zero in step S1608. In the following step S1610, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator. Then, in step S1611, parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section are initialized, and then the second section display process is ended.

More specifically, regarding the initialization process of advantageous section information in step S1610, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42(b), first, in step S1651, initialization process of the AT start determination area is executed. In this case, 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, is set as the initial number of games in the AT start determination area. In the following step S1652, initialization processing of the CZ end determination area is executed. In this case, the initial number of games is set in the CZ end determination area as 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, similarly to the AT start determination area. In the subsequent step S1653, initialization processing of the specialization end determination area is executed. In this case as well, 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, is set as the initial number of games in the specialization end determination area. Thereafter, in step S1654, other initialization processing is executed, and then the initialization processing of the advantageous section information is ended. Concerning step S1654, specifically, processing is executed to return the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. have not been cleared but have been set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the counters for the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of increased/decreased tickets for the advantageous section MY, the number of continuous games in the AT mode, etc. are greater than zero, these counters are all reset to zero. In other words, in this process of initializing information for advantageous sections, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification are initialized, regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification. This process clears the RAM regarding variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1607 that the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit, and that the number of increase/decrease tickets MY in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit increase, the process advances to step S1611, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not the If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1608, and processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the AT mode end flag is not set, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed as is.

That is, in this embodiment, after the transition to the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT mode is held, and if the transition lottery is won, the number of games in the advantageous section for starting the AT mode is set in the AT start determination area. Ru. Then, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the AT mode start process is executed and the AT mode is entered. As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is incremented by 1 each time you play one game in the advantageous section, regardless of whether the number of bets is a specified number or not.For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, After that, even if you play a 2-bet game or play in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state until the process for starting the AT mode is executed, the process for starting the AT mode The number of games played until the process is executed is not affected.

However, the process for starting the AT mode is executed on the condition that the number of bets is a specific specified number. If a game is played with a bet number that is not the specified specified number, the execution of the AT start process will be carried over and the start of the AT mode will be delayed.

In addition, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, you will be set in a specialized zone for 10 games, increasing the probability of winning the additional lottery, and if you do not win the AT mode transition lottery, The CZ mode is set between games, and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is improved. The add-on lottery and the AT mode transition lottery are executed on the condition that the number of bets is a specified number of regulations, so if you play with a number of bets that are not the specified number, you will not be able to enter these specialized zones or CZ mode. You may not be able to enjoy the benefits of

In other words, basically, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, it is set to be disadvantageous for the player to play the game up to the AT mode starting game with a bet number that is not the specified specified number.

However, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the effect for starting the AT mode is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is a specified number or not. By doing so, for example, there is no need for complicated performance processing such as correcting a deviation in performance toward the start of the AT mode according to the number of bets. Hereinafter, processing for performing effects for starting the AT mode will be explained in particular.

<Rotation effect processing>
First, a process for notifying on the main control device 101 side that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the number of games set in the AT start determination area will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the rotation effect processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The rotation effect process is a process executed in step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In the rotation effect processing, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether the AT pre-win game flag or the CZ pre-end game flag is set. As already explained, the AT pre-winning game flag is a flag that is set in the previous game when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, regardless of the number of bets, and before the end of CZ. The game flag is a flag that is set regardless of the number of bets in the previous game when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. If none of the flags is set, the rotation effect processing is immediately terminated.

If any flag is set, the process advances to step S1802, and it is determined whether the AT winning game flag is set. The case where the AT pre-winning game flag is set means that the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area in the relevant game, and in this case, AT winning is determined in step S1803. Execute processing to clear the previous game flag. Then, in step S1804, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set, and if it is set, in step S1805, the first AT notification rotation effect is executed as the current rotation effect. After setting, the rotation effect processing ends.

As the first AT notification rotation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, as shown in FIG. 52(b1), it corresponds to the first AT. As a symbol combination for the first AT, the "BAR" symbol temporarily stops (stops) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b3), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R The performance is set to restart. Note that the first AT notification rotation performance is a performance that is performed during an invalid period after the game starts and before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become valid.

If the first AT flag is not set in step S1804, it means that the second AT flag is set, and in this case, in step S1806, a second AT notification rotation effect is executed as the current rotation effect. After setting, the rotation effect processing is ended.

As a rotation effect for the second AT notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, as shown in FIG. 52(b1), it corresponds to the second AT. As a symbol combination for the second AT, the "White 7" symbol temporarily stops (stops) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. An effect is set to restart the rotation. Note that the second AT notification rotation performance is a performance that is performed during an invalid period after the game starts and before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become valid.

If the AT winning game flag is not set in step S1802 and the CZ before end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode will end in this game, and in this case, in step S1807. move on. In step S1807, processing for clearing the CZ before end game flag is executed. Then, in step S1808, a setting is made to execute a rotation effect for informing of a deviation as the current rotation effect, and then the rotation effect processing is ended.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the first AT symbol combination shown in FIG. Without temporarily stopping any of the symbol combinations for 2AT, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(b2), the loose eye is temporarily stopped on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. 52(b4). ), an effect is set in which the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R restarts. Note that the out-of-play notification rotation performance is a performance that is performed during an invalid period after the game starts and before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become valid.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 45. The effect setting process is a process activated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first in step S1901, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1902. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be stored individually and can be read from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after executing the process in step S1902, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and is a bet command set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet time command, in step S1904, a bet time performance setting process is executed to set a performance based on the current bet operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or after executing the process in step S1904, it is determined in step S1905 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes a lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, as well as a command corresponding to the lottery result. There are first AT commands, second AT commands, precursor commands, CZ commands, additional commands, press order notification commands, ceiling commands, etc. that are set in the process (FIG. 27) and the first section display process (FIG. 40). If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or after executing the process in step S1906, it is determined in step S1907 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main controller 101 in step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). This is a stop command that is set in . If it is a stop instruction command as a command at each stop operation, in step S1908, a performance setting process for each stop operation is executed to set a performance based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or after executing the process in step S1908, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to the commands, the 1st BB start command, 2nd BB start command, 1st BB end command, which are set in bonus status processing (FIG. 24), winning result corresponding processing (FIG. 36), and second section display processing (FIG. 38), There are a second BB end command, an AT start command, an AT end command, etc. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1910.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after executing the process in step S1910, other processes are executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S1911, the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S1911, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 at times other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and settings are made without using the main controller 101. Perform settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to the controller.

The start effect setting process and the full stop effect setting process will be described below.

<Start production setting process>
The start effect setting process in step S1906 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2001, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order win (push order bell win). If the pressing order winning combination is determined, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. If the push order notification command is received, in step S2003, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor win wins is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the lottery result of the current game is not a push-order winning, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a specific winning combination. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear in the lottery results of each game (hard to win), and in this embodiment, chance number A to chance number C, cherry. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific hands. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results, and as shown in FIG. 33, In the AT mode additional lottery that is triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the additional lottery is more likely to result in an additional lottery than when other lottery results are triggered. When the lottery result of the current game is a specific winning combination, in step S2005, processing for setting a specific winning combination notification effect is executed. In the specific role notification performance setting process, settings are executed so that a specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above-mentioned specific roles is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. . As a specific winning combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. A performance has been set up.

After executing the specific role notification effect setting process in step S2005, continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2006. The continuous performance setting process is a process for setting a continuous performance using a specific combination as an opportunity. Continuous performance means performing a series of performances over multiple games, and also includes an advantageous result performance that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable result performance that is more disadvantageous to the player than if the advantageous result performance had been performed. Any one of the plurality of result effects included is the effect that is finally executed. Note that the continuous performance may include a configuration in which the continuous performance ends without finally performing a result performance.

<Continuous production setting process>
In the continuous performance setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, in step S2101, it is determined whether a precursor command has been received as the current start command. The case where the precursor command has been received means that the AT mode transition has been won in the AT lottery process on the main control device 101 side. If the AT mode transition is successful, it is further determined in step S2102 whether or not the first AT command has been received as the current start command. The first AT command is a command that is output when the AT mode to be transferred to this time is determined to be the first AT mode in the AT type determination process executed based on the AT mode transfer election. If the first AT command has been received, in step S2103, a process of setting the first AT flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. Further, if the first AT command has not been received in step S2102, the second AT command has been received, and in this case, the process of setting the second AT flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2104. .

After executing the process in step S2103 or step S2104, in step S2105, a process is executed to grasp information on the number of precursor games included in the precursor command. As already explained, in this embodiment, in the case of winning the AT mode transition triggered by reaching the ceiling game, the number of precursor games is set from 1 game to 5 games, and the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode is set. If you win the transition, the number of precursor games will be set from 5 to 10 games, and if you win the transition to AT mode in the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the number of remaining games in CZ mode will be the number of precursor games. Set.

After the number of precursor games is determined in step S2105, a precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S2106.In step S2107, the number of precursor games determined in step S2105 is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. After inputting to the continuous performance counter provided in the counter area 183b, the continuous performance setting process is ended. The continuous performance counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of consecutive games (the number of precursor games) of the continuous performance, and is subtracted by 1 each time one game is completed.

In step S2101, even if the specific winning combination has been won, if no precursor command has been received, it is determined in step S2108 whether or not a CZ command has been received. If the CZ command has not been received, the continuous performance setting process is immediately ended. If a CZ command has been received, a pseudo omen lottery process is executed in step S2109. The pseudo omen lottery process is a process in which it is determined by lottery to execute a continuous performance in which an unfavorable result performance is finally performed. In the pseudo omen lottery process, for example, the probability of winning the pseudo omen lottery is set to vary depending on the type of specific winning combination that triggered the drawing, the setting value, etc. It may be made easier to win, or the lower the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, the easier it is to win the pseudo-harbinger lottery, and the relationship between the ease of winning may be reversed. Alternatively, each parameter may be applied in combination.

After executing the pseudo omen lottery process in step S2109, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not the pseudo omen lottery has been won. If you have won the pseudo-harbinger lottery, in step S2111, the number of games in the CZ mode included in the CZ command is set as the number of consecutive effects in the pseudo-harbinger, and the process of inputting the number of games into the continuous effect counter is executed. After that, the continuous performance setting process ends.

In the start time effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2002 or step S2004, or after executing the process in step S2003 or step S2006, the process advances to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether an additional command has been received. If an add-on command has been received, an add-on effect setting process is executed in step S2008. In the additional effect setting process, as a notification corresponding to the fact that the remaining number of games in the AT mode has been added, an additional effect is executed to display the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65. Note that the mode of the above-mentioned top-up effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the above-mentioned top-up is performed; for example, the number of top-up games is announced after a predetermined number of games, triggered by the game in which the above-mentioned top-up has been performed. For example, the configuration may include a so-called additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed when the number of remaining games in AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or after executing the process in step S2008, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not a ceiling command has been received as the current start command. If a ceiling command has been received and it is an advantageous section transition game, in step S2010, an effect setting process is executed for executing an advantageous section start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 according to the number of ceiling games. . As shown in Figures 53(a) to 53(c), the advantageous section start effect is a cut-in effect in which the face of the main character is displayed close-up, and Figure 54(b) is the normal main character's face. FIG. 53(a) shows a cut-in effect displaying the character's face, FIG. 53(a) shows a cut-in effect displaying the depressed main character's face, and FIG. 54(b) shows the main character's enthusiastic face. It shows a cut-in effect. In relation to the number of ceiling games, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 53(a) is likely to be selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively large, and the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 53(c) is likely to be selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively small. It is set to be easily selected. In other words, these effects at the start of each advantageous section can be said to be suggestive effects that suggest the number of ceiling games this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after executing the process in step S2010, in step S2011, a process is executed to determine whether or not the continuous effect counter is a value larger than 0. If the value is larger than 0, continuous effect processing is executed in step S2012. In the continuous performance processing, a continuous performance counter is updated, and settings are made for executing a continuous performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 according to the value of the continuous performance counter.

<Continuous production processing>
In the continuous performance in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the main character and the enemy character have a battle, and if the main character wins the battle, it will be an advantageous result as a notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. A performance is performed, and when the main character is defeated in the battle, a disadvantageous result performance is performed as a notification that the main character has not won the AT mode transition lottery. More specifically, at the start of the continuous performance, as shown in FIG. 51(a), as a start performance in which a battle occurs, characters such as "Battle Start!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the enemy character is displayed. Display the animation. Then, in each game of the continuous presentation, an attack presentation showing the main character attacking as shown in FIG. 51(b1) and an attack presentation showing the enemy character attacking as shown in FIG. 51(b2) are executed. do. Then, in the final game of the continuous performance, there is a victory performance in which the main character wins as an advantageous result performance (Fig. 51 (c1)), and a defeat performance in which the main character loses as an unfavorable result performance (Fig. 51 (c2)). The continuous performance ends when either of the following is performed.

In the continuous performance process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, in step S2201, it is determined whether a precursor command has been received. If a precursor command has been received, the presence or absence of a precursor flag is checked in step S2202, and if it is not set, processing is executed to set the precursor flag, and if it is set, the status is checked. maintain. In the process of step S2201 and step S2202, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the execution of the continuous performance as a pseudo-harbinger that has already been set, the continuous performance as the pseudo-harbinger is rewritten to one corresponding to the winning of the AT mode transition. This is a process for

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after executing the process in step S2202, a process to subtract 1 from the continuous effect counter is executed in step S2203. Then, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the omen flag is set, and if the omen flag is set, in step S2205, the omen effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a, and then , executes a process of acquiring performance data for the current game in the continuous performance from the precursor performance table and the current value of the continuous performance counter. In addition, the foreshadow effect table is set so that the smaller the value of the continuous effect counter is, the more likely the attack effect shown in FIG. 51 (b1) will occur, and the attack effect shown in FIG. The attack effect b1) is set to occur more easily.

If the omen flag is not set in step S2204, in step S2206, a pseudo omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the pseudo omen effect table is combined with the current continuous effect counter value. From there, processing is executed to obtain performance data for the current game in the continuous performance. In addition, the pseudo-precursor effect table is set so that the smaller the value of the continuous effect counter is, the more likely the attack effect shown in FIG. 51 (b2) will occur, and the attack effect shown in FIG. It is set so that the attack effect (b2) is more likely to occur.

After obtaining the effect data for the current game in step S2205 or step S2206, in step S2207, effect data is set so that the effect based on the obtained effect data is executed on the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. Execute the process that performs.

In the following step S2208, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, it is determined in step S2209 whether the precursor flag is set. If the omen flag is set and the current continuous performance corresponds to the AT mode shift winning, processing to clear the omen flag is executed in step S2210. Then, in step S2211, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set, and if it is set, in step S2212, the first AT notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. After performing the effect setting process, the continuous effect process is ended. If the first AT flag is not set, in step S2213, a performance setting process for executing the second AT notification performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed, and then the continuous performance process is ended. In addition, if it is determined in step S2209 that the precursor flag is not set, in step S2214 a performance setting process is performed to execute the failure notification performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, and then a continuous performance Finish the process.

Here, in this embodiment, in the continuous performance, the first AT notification performance, the second AT notification performance, and the miss notification performance as result performances are set as performances accompanied by rotation performance by each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, the first AT notification rotation performance, the second AT notification rotation performance, and the miss notification rotation performance, which are set in the rotation performance processing described in FIG. The game in which is played is the final game of the continuous performance, and when each of these rotating performances is performed, a first AT notification performance, a second AT notification performance, or a missed notification performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

Specifically, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, each AT notification rotating effect will occur as a rotating effect in a game where the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area; The number of games set in the AT start determination area corresponds to the number of precursor games, and a game in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 is a game that reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. Then, on the display control device 81 side, in order to execute continuous effects according to the number of precursor games, and to generate each AT notification effect as the result effect in the game where the number of precursor games becomes 0, the AT mode is set. The game in which the main control device 101 side performs a rotation effect triggered by winning the transfer lottery and the game in which the display control device 81 side performs a result effect are synchronized.

Further, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won due to a specific combination, the main controller 101 side executes the CZ mode transition lottery, and if the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the 10-game CZ mode is selected. is set to Then, if the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, a rotation performance to notify of failure will occur as a rotation performance in a game where the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. However, the number of games set in the CZ end determination area corresponds to the number of games in CZ mode, and a game in which the number of games in CZ mode becomes 0 reaches the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. becomes. Then, on the display control device 81 side, a continuous effect as a pseudo precursor is executed according to the number of games in the CZ mode, and in a game where the number of consecutive effects as a pseudo precursor becomes 0, the above result effect is executed. In order to generate a failure notification effect, a game in which a rotation effect is performed on the main control device 101 side using a non-winning in the AT mode shift lottery as an opportunity, and a game in which a result effect is performed on the display control device 81 side are also synchronized. .

Incidentally, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set as the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. Therefore, if a continuous performance is being executed as a pseudo precursor based on the winning of a specific role that triggered the CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during that CZ mode, the continuous performance that has already been executed will be It is possible to switch to a continuous performance corresponding to AT mode transition winning without changing the number of remaining games. More specifically, if a precursor command is received during the execution of a continuous performance as a pseudo precursor in which the precursor flag is not set, the precursor flag is set in step S2202 in the continuous performance process. As a result, the continuous performance on the display control device 81 side is switched to one corresponding to the AT mode shift winning. Then, since the main control device 101 side performs a rotation effect when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of games in the AT start determination area, even in this case, the main control device 101 side performs a rotation effect; The display control device 81 side also synchronizes with the game in which the results are presented.

However, as already explained, although counting of the number of advantageous zone games AG is executed regardless of whether or not the number of bets is a specified number, specific processing related to the instruction function based on the information in the judgment information storage area 106f is performed. Since the execution is carried out in a game where the number of bets is a specified number, in particular, the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed and the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotation effect or continuous effect, Discrepancies may occur, and more specifically, the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed may be a later game than the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotating effect or continuous effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, each AT notification performance executed in the final game of the continuous performance is configured to be continued until the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed. In other words, the first AT notification effect and the second AT notification effect set in step S2212 and step S2213 are effects that can be continued over multiple games until the AT mode start process is performed as a predetermined end condition. It is.

In the start effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2011 or after executing the process in step S2012, a notification process corresponding to the number of bets is executed in step S2013, and other start effect settings are performed in step S2014. After executing the process, the main start effect setting process is ended. In step S2014, for example, processing is executed to set an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41, and to notify that the operation has been accepted. do.

As already explained, although the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is executed regardless of whether the number of bets is a specified number, the execution of specific processing related to the instruction function based on the information in the judgment information storage area 106f is , is played in a game where the number of bets is a specified number. The number-of-bets notification process in step S2013 is a process for performing notification when the number of bets for the game to be started this time is not a specified specified number.

<Number of bet notification processing>
In the bet number corresponding notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in step S2301, it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in any BB state. If it is not in any BB state, it is determined in step S2302 whether the number of bets for the game to be started this time is 3, and if the number of bets is 3, which is a specified number according to the gaming state. In this case, the bet number corresponding notification process is immediately terminated. If it is in any BB state in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the number of bets for the game to be started this time is 2, and if the number of bets is 2, a specified specified number according to the gaming state is determined. If so, the bet number corresponding notification process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, and the number of bets is not the specified number according to the gaming state, then in step S2304, effect settings are made to execute the limited effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. After executing the process, the notification process corresponding to the number of bets is ended. The restriction effect is used to notify the player that the number of bets in the current game is not a specified number according to the gaming state, and that the execution of processing related to instruction functions such as AT mode transition lottery and additional lottery will be restricted. For example, when executing a limited effect in a situation where a continuous effect is being performed, it is executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIGS. A band display with the words "HOLD" added is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of each effect being displayed.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at full stop in step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 50. As already explained, the all-stop performance setting process is performed when the newly received command is an all-stop command such as a winning result command, AT start command, AT end command, BB start command, or BB end command. This is a process for performing performance settings.

In step S2401, it is determined whether an AT termination command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, effect setting processing for performing an AT end effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed in step S2402. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the AT end effect displays the number of consecutive games in the current AT mode and the number of medals acquired in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether any BB start command has been received. If any of the BB start commands has been received, a production setting process is executed to perform a BB start production on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in accordance with the BB state, which is started in step S2404. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the BB start effect is set to display a display indicating that the BB state is started (character display such as "BB start"). Note that the BB start effects are different to the extent that the player can identify them depending on the starting BB state, and for example, the background and sound effects are set to be different.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether any BB end command has been received. If any BB end command has been received, then in step S2406, a performance setting process is executed to perform a BB end performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 according to the BB state to be ended. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the BB end effect is set to display a display indicating that the BB state is ended (character display such as "BB END"). Note that the BB end effects are different to the extent that the player can identify them depending on the BB state to be ended, and for example, the background and sound effects are set to be different.

As already explained, the BB state is set to be executed as a 3-bet game, and the specified number in the BB state is a 2-bet game, so the game in the BB state requires processing related to the instruction function. Execution is restricted. Therefore, limited effects are executed in each game during the BB state. That is, in a game where a BB end effect is performed, a limited effect is executed (see FIG. 56(b)). In addition, the first BB winning can occur in a 3-bet game, and the second BB winning can occur in a 2-bet game, but a game in which a BB start effect corresponding to the first BB state is performed requires processing related to the instruction function. Execution is not restricted and no restricted effect is performed, while in a game in which a BB start effect corresponding to the second BB state is performed, the execution of the process related to the instruction function is restricted and the restricted effect is performed (Fig. 56 ( a) shows the second BB start effect).

If a negative determination is made in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step S2408, the AT notification effect being executed is ended, and effect setting processing for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. The AT start effect is set, for example, as an effect in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (a text display such as "AT START") is performed. Note that the AT start effect differs to the extent that the player can identify it depending on the type of AT mode to be started, and for example, the background and sound effects are set to be different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed may be a later game than the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotation effect or continuous effect, but the process has already been executed. The AT notification performance that is being performed is completed based on the reception of the AT start command after processing for starting the AT mode is performed as a predetermined end condition. By doing this, if the game in which the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area is a game in which execution of the process for starting the AT mode, such as a 2-bet game, is restricted. Even in such a case, if the AT notification effect is performed in the game, the right to shift to the AT mode has expired by the time the process for starting the AT mode is performed. It becomes possible to suitably avoid a situation where a person misunderstands the situation.

After executing the process of step S2402, step S2404, step S2406, or step S2408, other all-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2409, and then the main all-stop effect setting process is ended. In step S2409, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The speaker 64 may control the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Game flow>
Using the timing chart of FIG. 57, a series of steps from winning the AT mode transition lottery to starting the AT mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), it is assumed that at timing ta1, which is in the advantageous section, an AT mode shift lottery is executed, for example, triggered by a specific combination, and that the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, the number of precursor games is set, and the number of games obtained by adding the number of precursor games to the number of advantageous section games AG is set in the AT start determination area. As already explained, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games (ta4) set in the AT start determination area, the process for starting the AT mode is performed. Then, it is set at ta1 that continuous effects will be performed in the games from ta1 to ta4.

In this case, for example, even if the timing of ta2 to ta3 leading up to the timing of ta4 is consumed in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, it will not affect the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is performed. . Then, at ta4, as an AT winning notification, a rotation effect by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each AT notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 etc. are executed, and a process for starting the AT mode is executed at ta4. Then, the display mode shifts from normal mode to AT mode.

Then, as described above, there is no need to readjust the continuous effect set at the timing of ta1 depending on whether there is a game such as a 2-bet game in which execution of the process related to the instruction function is restricted, and the processing configuration for performing the effect is eliminated. This makes it possible to achieve an overwhelming simplification of the process.

FIG. 57(b) shows a case where the number of games set in the AT start determination area is played by playing a game in which execution of processing related to the instruction function, such as a 2-bet game, is restricted.

In other words, at the timing of tb1 during the advantageous period, an AT mode transition lottery is executed with the winning of a specific combination as a trigger, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the setting of the number of portent games is changed as in the case of ta1 above. At the same time, the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is to be executed is set in the AT start determination area (tb3). Then, it is set at tb1 that continuous effects will be performed in the games from tb1 to tb3.

If the game is switched to a 2-bet game in tb2 before tb3, and the game in tb4 after tb3 is played in the 2-bet game, including the tb3 game, as described above. Execution of the set AT mode start process is carried over from tb3 to tb4. Then, in the game tb4, processing for starting the AT mode is executed, and the AT mode is started. Even in this case, in tb3, the rotation performance by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each AT notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65 etc. are executed as AT winning notification. In other words, even if the game set in the AT start determination area is played as a 2-bet game or the like, the number of games executed for AT winning notification is not affected. The AT winning notification executed at tb3 is continued until the process for starting the AT mode is executed at tb4.

<Advantages of the game during continuous performance>
FIG. 58 is a timing chart for explaining the difference in advantageousness between a situation in which a continuous performance is executed in a 3-bet game and a case in which a 2-bet game is performed.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that an AT mode shift lottery is held at timing ta11 in an advantageous section, triggered by a specific combination, and that the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, similarly to the above, the number of precursor games is set, and the number of games obtained by adding the number of precursor games to the current number of advantageous section games AG is set in the AT start determination area (ta14).

If the AT mode transition lottery is won, a precursor flag is set, but in the lottery result handling process, an additional AT mode lottery will be held even before the AT mode transition. In this embodiment, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the player is set to a specialized zone where the probability of winning is high for 10 games (from ta11 to ta15).

Then, as mentioned above, even if the games from ta12 to ta13, which are the games before reaching the number of games set in the AT start determination area, are played as 2-bet games, the process for starting the AT mode will not be completed. Although the number of games to be played will not be affected, the AT mode transition lottery will not be executed for the games from TA12 to TA13, so the benefits of the specialized zone will be enjoyed for the games from TA12 to TA13. become unable to do so. In other words, the number of medals lost per game is smaller in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game, so after winning the AT mode transfer lottery, you need to make 2 bets in order to finish the game with fewer medals until the AT mode starts. Although the game is more favorable for the player, by playing a 2-bet game, the benefits of the specialized zone cannot be enjoyed, so the number of medals lost until the start of AT mode and the benefit of the specialized zone are The player can select either one and play the game. By doing so, the number of game options increases and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when playing a 2-bet game until the start of AT mode, the average number of medals used is reduced compared to when playing a 3-bet game. The expected number of medals obtained is calculated from the number of additional games in AT mode that can be expected if the game is used up. In general, the setting is such that it is more advantageous for the player to play the 3-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), at timing tb11 in the advantageous section, an AT mode shift lottery is held triggered by a specific combination, and even if you do not win the AT mode shift lottery, you can still win the CZ mode shift lottery. Then, the CZ mode is set (from tb11 to tb15) in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high for 10 games.

Then, as mentioned above, after winning a specific combination, if you play the games from tb12 to tb13 among the games from tb11 to tb15 set in the CZ mode as a 2-bet game, Since the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the games from tb12 to tb13, it is no longer possible to enjoy the benefits of the CZ mode for the games from tb12 to tb13.

When the CZ mode is set at tb11, a continuous performance is executed for the number of games from tb11 to tb14 before the end of the CZ mode.

Here, in the continuous performance, although either a victory performance as an advantageous result performance or a defeat performance as an unfavorable result performance is set to be executed in the final game, each game up to the final game In the continuous performance triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery, both attack and attack effects can occur, and continuous performances triggered by not winning the AT mode transition lottery. However, both attack and attack effects can occur. Therefore, it is set that it is difficult or difficult to distinguish which of the advantageous result effect and the disadvantageous result effect is executed and ends in the continuous performance.

In other words, it is basically impossible to determine whether or not the AT mode transition lottery executed when a specific combination is won in tb11 is a win until the final game of the continuous performance. In addition, it is basically not possible to determine whether or not the AT mode transition lottery executed when a specific combination is won in ta11 is a win until the final game of the continuous performance. In other words, does each game in which continuous effects are performed starting from TA11 or TB11 until TA14 or TB14, where the continuous effects end, correspond to the specialized zone or correspond to CZ mode? I can't tell the difference. By doing this, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted not only when the continuous performance is started at ta11 but also when the continuous performance is started at tb11. is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the 3-bet game.

Here, in this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won using a specific role as a trigger, a continuous performance will be executed, while game results other than the specific role (normal roles such as normal Rip A to normal Rip C) will be executed. If the AT mode transition lottery is won as a trigger, or if the ceiling number of games is reached and the transition to AT mode is confirmed, the continuous performance will not be executed. In other words, even if the number of games in which the AT mode start process is executed is set in the AT start determination area, the effect may be performed for the game that executes the AT mode start process. There may be cases where this is not done. By doing this, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation even when playing each game in a situation where no continuous performance is being performed. In addition, even if continuous effects are not performed, when the number of games set in the AT start determination area is reached, at the start of the game, an AT notification rotation effect will be executed as a rotation effect for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, it is possible to create an effect that will leave the player stunned.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery and shifts to the CZ mode, the continuous performance is not executed if the pseudo-harbinger performance lottery is not won. In other words, the configuration is such that continuous performance may not be performed even in the CZ mode. By doing this, even if the continuous production does not start after winning a specific combination, it is possible to retain the hope of being in CZ mode and use it as a deterrent against playing in a 2-bet game. . In addition, even if continuous performance is not performed, when the number of games set in the CZ end determination area is reached, at the start of the game, a rotation performance for informing of failure is executed as a rotation performance of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, it is possible to create a performance that astonishes the player in addition to the AT notification rotating performance that does not involve the above-mentioned continuous performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a strong sense of excitement in each game in a situation where continuous performance is not performed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the transition to AT mode is confirmed by winning the AT mode transition lottery, etc., the number of games obtained by adding the number of portent games to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is set in the AT start judgment area, and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is set as the number of games in the AT start judgment area. The configuration is such that when the number of games reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, processing for starting the AT mode is performed. In this case, the process for starting the AT mode can be executed in a game with a specified number of bets depending on the gaming state, but it can be executed in a game with a different number of bets from the specified specified number, and if , If the game in which the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area is a game with a bet number different from the specified specified number, then a game with the specified specified number of bets is played. The configuration is such that when the AT mode is activated, the process for starting the AT mode is executed. In other words, after the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the execution of the process for starting the AT mode is made to wait until a game with a specified number of bets is played. . By doing this, the number of games in which the specific process related to the instruction function should be executed is set in the judgment information storage area 106f, and the number of games to be executed in the specific process related to the instruction function can be set in advance. The right to shift to AT mode after winning the AT mode shift lottery and playing a game with a bet number different from the specified specified number while simplifying the processing configuration to understand the execution game of the specific process. It is possible to suitably avoid an event in which the player is misled into thinking that the game has disappeared. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for playing the game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

After the initialization process of the advantageous section information, 1501, which is the number of games greater than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section, is input as the initial number of games into the AT start determination area. By doing so, in a configuration that uses the determination information storage area 106f, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience such as the process for starting the AT mode being executed without the transition to the AT mode being successful. .

A plurality of types of specific processing are provided as specific processing related to the instruction function, and an AT start determination area, a CZ end determination area, and a specialization end determination area are provided in the determination information storage area 106f according to the content of each specific process. Ta. In other words, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, processing for starting AT mode is performed as part of the specific process, and the number of games set in the CZ end determination area is In this case, the process for ending the CZ mode is performed as a process of the specific process, and when the number of games set in the specialization end determination area is reached, the process of ending the specialization zone is performed as a process of the specific process. The configuration was designed to perform the necessary processing. By doing so, it becomes possible to centrally manage whether or not to execute a plurality of specific processes and the execution timing using the determination information storage area 106f and the number of advantageous section games AG, thereby simplifying the processing configuration. Specifically, for example, in the initialization process of advantageous section information, rather than erasing the execution information corresponding to each specific process, the determination information storage area 106f itself is initialized (steps S1651 to S1651). S1653), and a significant simplification of processing can be expected.

Each area in the determination information storage area 106f can be accessed by the CPU 102 not only for a game with a specified number of bets depending on the gaming state, but also for a game with a bet amount other than the specified specified number. By doing this, the CPU 102 can recognize that the game is a game in which specific processing related to the instruction function should be executed, even in a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number. Therefore, when the specific process is to be executed in a game, even if the specific process is not executed, it is possible to notify that the specific process is to be executed in the game. In addition, by storing information indicating that the game has already become a game where the specific process should be executed (for example, CZ end flag, specialization end flag, etc.), the next game with the specified number of bets will be If this is done, there is no need to check the corresponding determination information storage area 106f again, so it is possible to simplify the process.

For example, when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG becomes the number of games set in the AT start determination area, whether the game is a game with a specified specified number of bets or a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number. Regardless of whether or not the process for starting the AT mode is performed in the game, the main controller 101 controls the AT notification rotation effect by each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game. Then, on the display control device 81 side, an AT notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like in the game. In other words, for example, if a game is played with a bet number other than the specified specified number, the AT notification rotation effect or the game that executes the AT notification effect will not be delayed. Regardless of whether or not the game is being executed, the AT notification rotation effect and the AT notification effect are executed in the game set in the AT start determination area. By doing so, significant simplification of processing is realized.

Moreover, on the display control device 81 side, a game for executing the AT notification effect is set in the continuous effect counter based on the precursor command output from the main control device 101 side when the AT mode transition lottery is won. The AT notification effect is executed when the continuous effect counter, which is updated every time one game is played, becomes 0. In other words, the display control device 81 side is configured so that it does not even judge whether or not a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number has been executed when executing a continuous effect, thereby realizing a significant simplification of processing. .

If the result of the AT mode transition lottery is a win, a continuous performance is executed according to the number of portent games, and if the result of the AT mode transition lottery is a non-win, the CZ mode transition lottery is won. On the condition that this is the case, a continuous performance using the pseudo-harbinger performance table is executed. In other words, the continuous performance is configured to be able to start regardless of whether the AT mode shift lottery is successful or not, and has the effect of preventing the game from being consumed by a bet number other than the specified number until the process for starting the AT mode is performed. can be expected.

However, if an AT notification performance is performed as a result performance in a continuous performance, if the game is a game with a bet number other than the specified number, the AT start command will not be received. The game is configured to continue until the process for starting the AT mode is executed in a game in which a command is received, that is, a game with a specified number of bets. By doing this, the player may mistakenly think that the right to shift to AT mode has been extinguished because AT mode does not start even though the AT notification effect has been performed. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon of

The number of medals (net increase) that can be expected per game is larger in a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number than in a game with a specified specified number of bets. More specifically, if internal states and non-internal states other than the BB state are used in a 3-bet game, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected, and these internal states and non-internal states can be reduced by 2. If consumed in a bet game, it can be expected that about 0.64 medals will be reduced per game, so internal states and non-internal states are consumed in a 2-bet game more than in a 3-bet game. In this case, the number of net additions is higher. Furthermore, in the BB state, a decrease (increase) of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game, so the net increase in medals is larger than when the internal state and non-internal state are used in a 3-bet game. With such a configuration, for example, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the game until the process for starting the AT mode is performed can be played as a 2-bet game or played in the BB state. By doing so, it becomes possible to wait for the start of AT mode while suppressing the medal loss until AT mode starts, and even if the execution of press order notification processing and specific processing is restricted, the 2-bet game There are advantages for the player of playing the game in the BB state and playing the game in the BB state. Therefore, if a game requires a specific process to be executed in a game with a number of bets other than the specified number of bets, there is a significance in making the execution of the specific process wait until a game with a specified number of bets. .

As mentioned above, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the system can shift to the CZ mode. However, while the AT mode transition lottery is executed in games with a specified number of bets, The configuration is such that it is not executed in games with bet numbers other than the specified specified number. In other words, even if you do not win the AT mode transition lottery, you cannot receive the AT mode transition lottery unless you play the game with a specific prescribed number of bets, so you cannot enjoy the benefits of the CZ mode. By doing this, at least from the time an opportunity arises to set the number of games in the AT start determination area until the game in which specific processing can be performed, the game is completed with a bet number other than the specified specified number. It becomes possible to suppress this.

In addition, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, you can move to the specialized zone. The configuration is such that it is not executed in games with bet numbers other than numbers. In other words, if you win the lottery to switch to AT mode, you will not be able to receive the additional lottery for AT mode unless you play the game with the specified number of bets, so you will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the specialized zone. . By doing this, at least from the time when an opportunity arises to set the number of games in the AT start determination area until the game where specific processing can be performed, the game will not be played with a bet number other than the specified specified number. It is possible to suppress the

In particular, for these CZ modes and specialized zones, the lottery result of the game becomes a specific combination as a so-called rare combination, making it easy to shift to the AT mode transition lottery based on such a specific combination. In other words, it is easier to win in the AT mode transition lottery that is triggered by a specific role than in the AT mode transition lottery that is triggered by a result other than a specific role, and as a result, it is easier to transition to the specialized zone using the specific role as an opportunity. Become. In addition, even if you do not win in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a specific role, in the CZ mode transition lottery that is triggered by the non-winning, it is better to trigger the specific role than to be triggered by a result other than the specific role. It is easier to win than if you play the game, and it is also easier to shift to CZ mode using a specific combination as an opportunity. Then, when it comes to a specific combination in which the number of games can be set in the AT start determination area, a high probability AT It is more advantageous for the player to play a game with a specified specified number of bets in which a mode transition lottery or a high-probability additional lottery is performed than to play with a bet number other than the specified specified number. Therefore, after the number of games is set in the AT start determination area, there are inconveniences caused by playing with a bet number other than the specific specified number (for example, a continuous performance progresses in a 3-bet game, but in a 2-bet game) This makes it possible to avoid problems such as the inconvenience of a shift in the ending game when the game is prevented from progressing, and the inconvenience of not being able to change the game state such as RT due to the inability to notify the pressing order.

If you do not win the AT mode shift lottery and shift to CZ mode, a continuous performance based on the pseudo-harbinger performance table will be performed, and during the continuous performance based on the pseudo-harbinger performance table, you will not be able to switch to AT mode. If the lottery is won, only the content of the continuous performance is changed without changing the final game (game in which the resultant performance is performed) of the continuous performance that is currently being executed. More specifically, the continuous performance based on the pseudo-harbinger performance table is set to be executed for the number of consecutive games of the CZ mode, and if the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, The remaining number of games in the CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games, and the number of games in the AT start determination area is set. By doing this, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the phenomenon in which the propriety of the AT mode transition lottery is determined based on the difference in the number of games in the continuous production, and the situation where the continuous production is performed can be It is possible to suitably suppress games being played with a bet number other than the number of bets.

In this case, on the display control device 81 side, the continuous effect when the number of games is set in the AT start determination area is started before the number of games is set in the AT start determination area. . With such a configuration, when using a configuration in which the number of games to be executed for specific processing is set in the judgment information storage area 106f, the performance setting itself for the number of games to be executed is This is performed before setting the number of games to be played, and it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load when setting the number of games to be played.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, information on the number of ceiling games is also set as information set in the determination information storage area 106f. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing processing for advantageous section transition games in this embodiment.

In step S2501, a process of acquiring a ceiling table is executed, and in step S2502, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. The processing in step S2501 and step S2502 is similar to the processing in step S1501 and step S1502 described above.

In step S2503, a process is executed to set information on the number of ceiling games selected in step S2502 in the ceiling determination area provided in the determination information storage area 106f. For example, if 999 games are selected as the number of ceiling games, 999 games will be input into the ceiling determination area. That is, the process in step S2503 is a process for setting the number of games in the advantageous period in which the specific process related to the instruction function is executed. Incidentally, the initial setting value set in the ceiling determination area after the initialization process of the RAM 106 and the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period is 1501, and the number of games is set to be larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous period. Note that the initial setting value may be set to 999 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the ceiling game lottery process.

Then, in step S2504, a process is executed to set a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT lottery process is carried out in the lottery result response process when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state in a situation where the transition to AT mode during the advantageous section is not confirmed. This is the process to be performed. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner of processing for determining whether the ceiling number of games has been reached.

That is, in step S2601, processing is executed to grasp the number of advantageous section games AG. In the subsequent step S2602, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the ceiling determination area. If the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the ceiling determination area, the process proceeds to step S2611 and executes the AT mode transition winning process without going through the AT mode transition lottery process of steps S2603 to S2610. . On the other hand, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is less than the number of games set in the ceiling determination area, the process advances to step S2603, and processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the ceiling determination area in the determination information storage area 106f, the ceiling is reached and the transition is made to the AT mode. As a result, in games with a specified specified number of bets, processing related to the instruction function such as push order notification processing and AT mode transition lottery are allowed, while in games with a bet other than the specified specified number, these instruction functions are allowed. Although the configuration is based on a configuration in which execution of processing related to If you are aiming to reach this goal, it is possible to realize the gameplay of playing each game with a bet number other than the specific specified number on the side with a large net increase in the number of coins. However, even if the ceiling is reached, at least in order to start the AT mode, it is necessary to play the game with a specified specified number of bets, and with such a configuration, specific processing related to the instruction function can be performed. To realize novel gameplay up to the above-mentioned ceiling, within the scope that does not contradict the meaning of providing a game with a specified number of bets that can be executed and a game with a number of bets other than the specified specified number that cannot be executed. becomes possible.

In the advantageous section transition game process, based on the fact that the number of games corresponding to the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling determination area, an advantageous section start effect corresponding to the number of ceiling games is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 etc. (step S2009, Step S2010, FIG. 53) is executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to suggest the number of games set in the ceiling judgment area in the judgment information storage area 106f, and based on the suggestion, the contents (ceiling number of games) of the judgment information storage area 106f can be predicted. It becomes possible to have the player play the game.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, specific processing related to the instruction function is executed using the number of advantageous section games AG, information stored in the judgment information storage area 106f, and information set in the various flag storage areas 106d. make the contents different. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this embodiment.

In the AT lottery process in this embodiment, information regarding the number of games in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed, information regarding the number of games in which the process for ending the CZ mode is executed, and information regarding the number of games in which the process for ending the specialized zone is executed. This embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments in that information regarding numbers is input into a specific determination area in the determination information storage area 106f.

That is, the processing from step S2701 to step S2711 is similar to the processing from step S801 to step S811 described above, and after the AT mode transition lottery is executed according to the game results and display mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won. Then, set the AT mode type. In the AT start game setting process in step S2712, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, in steps S2807 and S2810, information regarding the number of games for which the AT mode start process should be executed is input into the determination information storage area 106f. Then, input it to the specific determination area instead of the AT start determination area. In the AT start game setting process, other processes except step S2807 and step S2810 are the same as the corresponding processes in the first and second embodiments.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT start game setting process is executed in step S2712, the process for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in steps S2713 and S2714. Thereafter, in step S2715, processing for setting the specialized zone flag is executed, and then the present AT lottery processing is ended. That is, in this embodiment, the process of inputting information regarding the number of games for which the specialized zone ending process is to be executed into the determination information storage area 106f is omitted.

If it is determined in step S2710 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, processes such as a CZ mode transition lottery are performed in steps S2716 to S2718. When shifting to the CZ mode (step S2718: YES), the number of games AG in the advantageous section is determined in step S2719, and the current number of games AG is determined in step S2720 as information regarding the number of games for which the process for ending the CZ mode is executed. A process is executed in which the number of games obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is input into the above-mentioned specific determination area. Then, a CZ mode flag is set in step S2721, a CZ command is set in step S2722, and then the AT lottery process ends.

In the AT start game determination process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, in step S2901, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games in the specific determination area rather than the AT start determination area. By determining this, it is determined whether or not the game should execute the process for starting the AT mode. Other processes in the AT start game determination process are the same as those in the first and second embodiments.

In the specific determination area processing in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not a precursor flag is set, and if it is set, a process of setting an AT pre-winning game flag is executed in step S3003. .

If it is determined in step S3002 that the precursor flag is not set, or after executing the process in step S3003, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and if it is set, a process of setting a CZ before end game flag in step S3005, and setting a CZ end flag in step S3006. Execute. If it is determined in step S3004 that the CZ mode flag is not set, or after executing the process in step S3006, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialization zone flag is set, processing for setting a specialization end flag is executed in step S3008. If a negative determination is made in step S3001 or step S3007, or after executing the process in step S3008, the specific determination area process ends.

In the rotation effect processing in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in step S3101, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the AT pre-winning game flag is set, and if it is set, each AT notification rotation effect is determined in steps S3103 to S3106. Execute the process to do so. On the other hand, even if the advantageous section game number AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area, if the AT pre-winning game flag is not set and the CZ pre-end game flag is set, step S3107 - In step S3108, processing for performing a rotation effect for discrepancy notification is executed. The processing from step S3102 to step S3108 is similar to the processing from step S1802 to step S1808 described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, information on the number of games for which specific processing regarding the instruction function should be executed is input into the specific determination area, and the game in which the number of advantageous section games AG is input into the specific determination area If the number is reached, it is determined which specific process should be executed using various information set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and the corresponding specific process (process for starting AT mode, process for starting CZ mode) is executed. The configuration is configured to execute (termination processing, specialized zone termination processing). More specifically, when the number of games input into the specific judgment area is reached in a situation where the precursor flag is set, the process for starting AT mode is executed, and when the CZ mode flag is set, the number of games input into the specific judgment area is executed. When the number of games entered is reached, the processing for ending the CZ mode is executed, and when the number of games input in the specific judgment area is reached in a situation where the specialized zone flag is set, the processing for ending the specialized zone is executed. Ru. By doing so, it becomes possible to achieve an overwhelming simplification of the configuration compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of numbers of games for specific determination are set in the determination information storage area 106f.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even in the production processing (rotation production processing) for performing production corresponding to the content of the specific processing related to the instruction function, the number of advantageous section games AG is equal to the number of games input into the specific determination area. If this happens, use the various information set in the various flag storage areas 106d to determine which specific process should be executed, and then execute the corresponding performance process (processing for performing each AT notification rotation performance). , a process for performing rotation performance for discrepancy notification). More specifically, when the number of games input in the specific determination area is reached in a situation where the AT pre-win game flag is set, the process for performing each AT notification rotation effect is executed, and the CZ pre-win game flag is set. When the number of games input in the specific determination area is reached in the set situation, a process for performing a rotation effect for reporting an error is executed. In this way, by using the number of games input into the specific determination area, not only the specific processing related to the instruction function is performed, but also other processing such as the production that should be linked with the number of advantageous section games AG can be configured. , it becomes possible to overwhelmingly simplify the processing configuration for performing the performance.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described above, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG becomes the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f, and the number of bets on that game is not the specified number according to the gaming state, , the execution of the specific process related to the instruction function is carried over until the game with a specified specified number of bets, but in this embodiment, the execution of the specific process is not carried over. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing lottery result corresponding processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the second process for specific determination area is executed in step S3201. The second process for the specific judgment area determines whether or not to execute the process for starting the AT mode when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start judgment area. This is a process that is determined according to the number. After executing the second process for the specific determination area, in steps S3202 to S3213, processes for advantageous sections, processes for AT mode, and processes for press order notification are executed. The processing from step S3202 to step S3213 is similar to the processing from step S601 to step S612 described above.

In the second process for specific determination area, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a precursor flag is set. If the precursor flag is not set, the second processing for the specific determination area is ended. If the precursor flag is set, it is determined in step S3302 whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG of the current game is the number of games set in the AT start determination area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not any BB status flag is set. If not, in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3. Determine whether Further, if any BB status flag is set, it is determined in step S3305 whether the number of bets is 2 or not.

That is, the processing from step S3303 to step S3305 is a process for determining whether or not the number of bets in the game started this time is a specified number according to the gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304 or step S3305, it is assumed that the number of bets in the game started this time is the specific specified number according to the gaming state, and the second processing for the specific determination area is directly terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304 or step S3305, this means that the number of bets in the game started this time is not the specified number according to the gaming state, and in this case, the process advances to step S3306.

In step S3306, processing for clearing the precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S3307, processing for clearing the first AT flag and the second AT flag is executed. In the following step S3308, processing for clearing the AT pre-winning game flag is executed. Then, in step S3309, a process of setting a pre-CZ end game flag is executed.

That is, by clearing the precursor flag, the first AT flag, and the second AT flag in steps S3306 and S3307, the process for starting the AT mode will not be executed in the subsequent AT start game determination process. , in the first place, since the precursor flag is cleared, information about winning the AT mode transition lottery that caused the precursor flag etc. to be set, that is, to shift to the AT mode acquired based on the AT mode transition lottery. Rights will be lost. Also, since the AT pre-win game flag is also cleared and the CZ pre-end game flag is set, in the rotation effect processing of this game, the process to execute each AT notification rotation effect is not performed. , a process for executing a rotation effect for informing of deviation is performed.

After executing the process of step S3309, a process of setting the avoidance command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3310, and then this second process for specific determination area ends. The avoidance command is based on the fact that although the AT mode transition lottery was won, the game in which the AT mode start process should be executed was played with a bet number that is not the specified number of bets. This is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that execution of the process has been avoided.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the continuous effect processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the continuous effect processing is a process executed as one process of the start effect setting process on the display control device 81 side, and more specifically, it is executed when the continuous effect counter is larger than 0. It is processing.

In step S3401, it is determined whether the above avoidance command has been received as the current start command. If an avoidance command has been received, processing for clearing the precursor flag and each AT flag is executed in step S3402. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or after executing the process in step S3402, in steps S3403 to S3416, performance setting processing for continuous performance is executed in accordance with the value of the continuous performance counter.

As mentioned above, when an avoidance command is received, the omen flag and each AT flag are cleared, so in a game where the continuous performance counter is 0, the result performance in the continuous performance is a victory performance (first AT notification performance). (or 2nd AT notification effect) will not be executed, and a defeat effect (missing notification effect) will be executed.

The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 69.

If a specific winning combination is won in the game t21, which is in the advantageous period, and the AT mode shift lottery based on the specific winning combination is won, the number of portent games is set, and a mark for starting the AT mode is placed in the AT start judgment area. The game to be processed is set as the game at t23.

From the game at t22, which is before t23, to the game at t24, which is after t23, the player played with a bet number that is not the specified number according to the gaming state, such as playing in any BB state. In this case, the process for starting the AT mode is not executed in the game at t23, and the process for starting the AT mode is not executed in the game at t24. In other words, based on the fact that the game at t23 was played with a bet number that was not the specified specified number, the right to shift to the AT mode acquired at t21 is extinguished.

Then, in the continuous performance that started from t21, although the performance was performed based on the foreshadowing performance table until the game before the game at t23, in the game at t23, the performance was based on the foreshadowing performance table to the pseudo-harbinger performance table. , the result performance in the continuous performance will be a defeat performance instead of a victory performance. In addition, the rotation performance by each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game at t23 will also be switched from each AT notification rotation performance to the notification rotation performance.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If you win the AT mode transition lottery and the number of games for which the process for starting AT mode is to be executed is set in the AT start determination area, the number of games for which the process for starting AT mode should be executed is set to the specified number of games. If you use a bet number other than The configuration is such that the process for starting the AT mode is not performed unless the transition lottery is won. By doing this, you can specify the game until the process for starting the AT mode is executed, based on the reason that the net increase in coins is larger (the number of lost coins is smaller) when bet with a number other than the specified number of bets. It is possible to suitably prevent a bet number other than the specified number from being spent.

If a game in which the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the AT start determination area is played with a bet number other than the specified number, the process for starting the AT mode will not be performed as described above. However, the configuration is such that the information regarding the number of games set in the AT start determination area is maintained as is. In other words, by entrusting the management (setting, deletion, etc.) of the information in the AT start judgment area to the game based on the specified specified number of bets, it is possible to manage whether or not to execute various processes related to the instruction function using the specified specified number. It is possible to avoid executing the process for starting the AT mode without violating the meaning. Note that even with the above configuration, the number of advantageous section games AG is not subtracted in one advantageous section, so after the number of advantageous section games AG exceeds the number of games set in the AT start determination area, Again, the number of games in the advantageous section AG will not become the number of games set in the AT start determination area, and the process for starting the AT mode will not be performed.

As mentioned above, the 2-bet game in the internal state and the non-internal state corresponds to a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number, and each game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state also corresponds to a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number. The first BB state and the second BB state are states that can be continued over multiple games, and once the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is made, the first BB state or the second BB state The first BB state and the second BB state can continue until the termination condition for the second BB state is satisfied. In other words, if the transition to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state occurs near the number of games in which the process for starting the AT mode should be executed, the process for starting the AT mode will inevitably occur during the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. There is a possibility that the number of games for which processing should be executed will be reached. Therefore, especially immediately before the process for starting the AT mode, it is possible to urge the player to be careful not to cause a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state, and to have the player play the game with a sense of tension.

Note that the end conditions for the first BB state and the second BB state may be different. For example, the upper limit payout number in the first BB state is 15 (15 is set in step S506), while the upper limit in the second BB state is 15 coins (15 is set in step S506). The number of payouts may be set to 150 coins (150 is set in step S511), which is greater than 15 coins. In this case, the first BB state ends in approximately 2 games (13 coins paid out + 13 coins paid out = 26 coins paid out), while the 2nd BB state ends in approximately 12 games (13 coins paid out x 12 = 156 coins paid out). Become. In other words, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won and the transition is made to the 1st BB state, if there are no games within 2 games that require processing for starting the AT mode, the 1BB state Although the number of games for which processing for starting AT mode is reached after the end of the state, if the transition is made to the second BB state, the number of games for which processing for starting AT mode is performed during the second BB state is reached ( (number of precursor games ≦ 10 games). In this way, by configuring a configuration in which whether or not the number of games for which the process for starting AT mode should be executed during the BB state is different depending on the BB state to be transferred, it is possible to change the BB state where winnings should not be made. It is also possible to use the difference in tension depending on the type to increase the interest of the game.

In this configuration where the ending conditions are different for the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, it is possible for the 1st BB to win a prize in a 3-bet game, but it is not possible to win a prize in a 2-bet game, and the 2nd BB cannot win a prize in a 2-bet game. Although it is possible to win in the game, it is not possible to win in the 3-bet game, but by changing this configuration, it is possible for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB to win in the 3-bet game. By making this possible, the tension of the game after winning to switch to AT mode will vary greatly depending on which BB is won, and if you win to switch to AT mode in a situation where you have won the second BB. If the player wins the first BB, the sense of tension increases, and if the player wins the AT mode shift in a situation where the player wins the first BB, the sense of tension decreases, which can be used to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the ending conditions are different for the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, if you win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the configuration that allows you to avoid winning becomes impossible (winning in the winning game). In this case, if the 1st BB is won after winning to switch to AT mode, depending on the relationship between the winning game and the game that should perform the process to start AT mode, the process for starting AT mode may be changed. Although there is a possibility that the process will be carried out, if you win the second BB, the process to start AT mode will not be carried out regardless of the winning game, and the right to switch to AT mode will be lost. It is also possible to realize playability.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, novel gameplay using the present invention will be described in which specific processing related to the instruction function is executed when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f. . FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing AT start game determination processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT start game determination process is a process that is executed when the number of bets is a specified number according to the gaming state and the precursor flag is set in the winning result corresponding process.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the AT start determination area.If the number of games is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the AT start determination area, a precursor flag is flagged in step S3502. is cleared, and a process of adding 50 to the AT counter is executed in step S3503. Then, in step S3504, specific determination content setting processing is executed, and then in steps S3505 to S3510, processing for starting the AT mode is executed. The processing from step S3505 to step S3510 is similar to the processing from step S1304 to step S1309.

The specific determination content setting process in step S3504 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71. The specific determination content setting process is a process for determining the content of the specific process regarding the instruction function to be executed in the game that is set in the determination information storage area 106f.

In step S3601, a specific additional lottery process is executed. In the specific add-on lottery process, it is determined by a lottery whether or not to execute the AT mode add-on process as the above-mentioned specific process. The probability of winning the specific additional lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, if the specific additional lottery process has a configuration in which there is a 50% probability of winning the specific additional lottery process, AT mode will be selected as the specific process once every two times. Additional processing will be executed. After executing the specific bonus lottery process in step S3601, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the specific bonus lottery process has been won. If the winner has been won, in step S3603, a process of setting a specific additional flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The specific addition flag is a flag for determining that when the CPU 102 performs specific processing related to the instruction function, an additional process for the AT mode should be executed as the specific processing. Then, in step S3604, processing is executed to set the specific additional winning command as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, or after executing the process in step S3604, in step S3605, 10 games are added to the current number of advantageous zone games AG in the specific determination area in the determination information storage area 106f. Execute the process of inputting the number of games added. Then, in step S3606, a process is executed to set the content setting command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the specific content setting process is ended. The content setting command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the number of games for which specific processing should be executed has been input in the specific determination area.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing specific determination area processing in this embodiment.

The processing from step S3701 to step S3710 is similar to the processing from step S1701 to step S1710 described above, and is a game in which the number of advantageous section games AG is set in the AT start determination area, CZ end determination area, and specialization end determination area. Execute pre-processing to execute specific processing when the number is reached.

In step S3711, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. In other words, as mentioned above, in the process for starting the AT mode, the number of games obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is set in the specific judgment area. The number of games set in the area will be reached. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, specific determination processing is executed in step S3112.

In the specific determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, it is determined in step S3801 whether any BB status flag is set, and if it is not set, the number of bets is determined in step S3802. It is determined whether or not is 3. Further, if any BB status flag is set, it is determined in step S3803 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. That is, the processing from step S3801 to step S3803 is a process for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specified number corresponding to the gaming state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 or step S3803, and the number is the specified specified number according to the gaming state, the process advances to step S3804. In step S3804, it is determined whether the above-mentioned specific addition flag is set. If the specific add-on flag is set, processing to clear the specific add-on flag is executed in step S3805. Then, in step S3806, an additional game number lottery process is executed.

In addition, in the number of additional games lottery process in this embodiment, the current number of additional games is selected by lottery from the number of additional games from 10 games to 50 games, and the average number of additional games is set as 20 games. For example, like the normal lottery process for the number of additional games, the number of additional games may be set to vary depending on the lottery result of the current game, and the number of additional games may be set to be different depending on the lottery result of the current game. It may be set so that a larger number of additional games is more likely to be selected for chance item C, which has a lower appearance rate than chance item A. Further, the number of additional games may be set to vary depending on the setting value set by the winning probability setting process, and the higher the setting, the more likely the number of additional games is to be selected.

After executing the lottery process for the number of add-on games in step S3806, a process for adding the current number of add-on games to the AT counter is executed in step S3807. Then, in step S3808, a specific add-on command including information on the current number of add-on games is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

In step S3804, if the specific bonus flag is not set and the specific bonus lottery was not won in the previous specific determination content setting process, the process advances to step S3809. In step S3809, a subtraction game number lottery process is executed. The subtraction game number lottery process is a process for executing a specific process of subtracting the number of games determined by the lottery from the remaining number of games in the current AT mode, and also for determining the number of games to be subtracted.

In the subtraction game number lottery process in this embodiment, the current number of subtraction games is selected by lottery from the number of subtraction games from 10 games to 50 games, and the average number of subtraction games is set as 20 games. For example, as in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the number of subtracted games may be set to be different depending on the lottery result of the current game, and the number of subtracted games may be set to be different depending on the lottery result of the current game. It may be set so that chance C, which has a lower appearance rate than A, is more likely to have a smaller number of subtraction games selected. Further, the number of subtraction games may be set to vary depending on the setting value set by the winning probability setting process, and the setting may be such that the higher the setting, the easier it is to select a smaller number of subtraction games. Further, in the subtraction game number lottery process, the maximum subtraction game number may be changed each time so that the subtraction game number is less than the remaining number of games in the current AT mode. Furthermore, instead of determining the number of games to be subtracted by lottery, it may be configured to determine by lottery what percentage of the remaining number of games in the current AT mode is to be subtracted.For example, if the number of remaining games in the current AT mode is If the number of games is 50 and it is determined that 40% of the number of games is to be subtracted, the configuration may be such that 20 games are the number of games to be subtracted.

After executing the subtraction game number lottery process in step S3809, a process of subtracting the current subtraction game number from the AT counter is executed in step S3810. Then, in step S3811, a subtraction command including information on the number of games to be subtracted this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

Note that in a configuration in which the number of subtracted games lottery process can determine the number of subtracted games that is greater than or equal to the current number of remaining games in AT mode, when performing the subtraction process in step S3810, the number of subtracted games is larger than the current AT counter value. A situation may arise where a value is subtracted from the AT counter. In this case, for example, by setting the AT counter to 0 instead of setting it to a negative value, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a processing error. If a value larger than the value of the AT counter is subtracted, the process for ending the AT mode (steps S1206 to S1211) will be executed in the next game. In addition, when subtracting a value larger than the value of the AT counter, a configuration may be adopted in which processing for ending the AT mode is executed in the current game.

After executing the processing in step S3808 or step S3811, in step S3812, specific determination content setting processing is executed, and then the present specific determination processing is ended. The specific determination content setting process is the process shown in FIG. 71 above, and is a process for setting the content of the specific process (AT mode game addition process or AT mode game count subtraction process) to be executed after 10 games. It is. In other words, a specific process is executed at a cycle of a predetermined number of games in the AT mode, and each specific process The content is determined by a lottery as a special additional lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S3802 or step S3803, and the number of bets in the current game is not the specified number according to the gaming state, the process advances to step S3813. In step S3813, a process of setting an avoidance flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S3814, the process of setting the avoidance command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this specific determination process is ended. The avoidance flag in this embodiment is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that execution of the specific process in the number of games set in the specific determination area has been avoided, and the avoidance command is sent to the display control device 81. This is a command to make the user understand the information.

In the process for specific determination area, if a negative determination is made in step S3711 or after executing the process in step S3712, the process advances to step S3713. In step S3713, it is determined whether the above avoidance flag is set. If the avoidance flag is set, it is determined in steps S3714 to S3716 whether the number of bets in the current game is a specified number according to the gaming state. That is, in step S3714, it is determined whether any BB status flag is set. If not, it is determined in step S3715 whether or not the number of bets is 3. If any BB status flag is set, it is determined in step S3716 whether the number of bets is 2 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3715 or step S3716 that the specified specified number is met, the above-described specific determination content setting process (FIG. 71) is executed in step S3717. Then, in step S3718, the process of clearing the avoidance flag is executed, and then the specific determination area process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S3713, step S3715, or step S3716, the specific determination area processing is immediately terminated.

As mentioned above, regarding the specific processing executed for each predetermined game in the AT mode, the specific determination effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. The specific determination performance setting process is, for example, a process executed as one of the processes in step S2409 in the full stop performance setting process (FIG. 50). It should be noted that the specific judgment effect setting process will be explained while showing examples of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 75 to 78.

In step S3901, it is determined whether a content setting command has been received as the current full stop command. The content setting command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the specific determination content setting process is executed. If a content setting command has been received, in step S3902, a process is executed in which 10, which corresponds to the number of games until specific processing is performed, is input into a specific determination counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. In the following step S3903, it is determined whether a specific additional winning command has been received as the current full stop command. The specific bonus winning command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the specific bonus lottery process in the specific determination content setting process is won. If the specific additional winning command has been received, in step S3904, processing is executed to set a specific additional winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or step S3903, or after the process in step S3904 is executed, in step S3905, a process of subtracting the specific determination counter is executed. This process is a process for updating the specific determination counter set in step S3902 above in accordance with the progress of the game, and in step S3905, 1 is subtracted from the specific determination counter.

As described above, the specific determination counter is a counter corresponding to the number of games until the specific process is executed in the AT mode, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , the number of games corresponding to the value of the specific determination counter is displayed as the number of games until the specific determination. Then, each time the value of the specific determination counter is updated in step S3905, a process for updating the display of the number of games up to the specific determination is executed in step S3906. FIG. 75(a) shows that the number of games until the specific determination is 10 games, and FIG. 75(b) shows that the number of games until the specific determination is one game. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in addition to displaying the number of games up to the specific determination, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is also displayed. For example, FIG. 75(a) shows that the number of remaining games in AT mode is 50 games, and FIG. 75(b) shows that the number of remaining games in AT mode is 41 games.

After executing the process of step S3906, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not a specific additional winning flag is set. If the specific additional winning flag is set, in steps S3908 to S3910, a process for executing a suggestion effect indicating that the content of the next specific process is a process for adding on AT mode. I do.

That is, in step S3908, a suggestion effect lottery process is executed. The suggestion effect lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect by lottery. The winning probability of the suggestion drawing lottery is arbitrary, but for example, the winning probability of the suggestion drawing lottery may vary depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the suggestion drawing lottery. You may make it easier to win. In addition, the probability of winning the suggestion effect lottery may be different depending on the content of the previous specific process, and the probability of winning the suggestion effect lottery is higher when the content of the previous specific process is a subtraction process than when it is an addition process. It may be possible to make it easier to win. Furthermore, the probability of winning the suggestion effect lottery may be different depending on whether or not the implementation of the previous specific process was avoided, and the probability of winning the suggestion effect lottery is higher when the implementation of the previous specific process is not avoided than when it is avoided. It may be possible to make it easier to win the suggestion effect lottery.

After executing the suggestion effect lottery process in step S3908, it is determined in step S3909 whether or not the suggestion effect lottery has been won. If the suggestion effect has been won, the suggestion effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker in step S3910. The effect setting process to be performed in step 64 is executed. As the suggestive effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(b), an effect is set in which a predetermined character is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the left end) of the auxiliary display section 65. Note that FIG. 78(a) shows the content of the performance in the case where the player does not win the suggestion performance lottery, and in FIG. 78(a), the predetermined character as the suggestion performance is not displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3907 or step S3909, or after executing the process in step S3910, the process advances to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether any one of a specific additional command, subtraction command, and avoidance command has been received as the current full stop command. If no command has been received, the specific determination effect setting process is immediately terminated. If any of these commands is received, it means that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the number of games set in the specific determination area, and the specific determination process has been performed on the main controller 101 side. This is the case. In this case, in step S3912, a performance setting process for performing a specific determination performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76(a), characters such as "JUDGE" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as the specific judgment effect, so that the player can inform the player that the game is scheduled to undergo specific processing. It is assumed that it can be clearly grasped. In addition, when a push order notification effect is performed in a game that performs a specific judgment time effect, the press order notification effect is such that the content of the push order notification effect is reduced in a predetermined area (for example, the right corner) on the auxiliary display section 65. By displaying this, the player can enjoy the specific judgment performance while grasping the contents of the press order notification. Note that the visibility of this pressing order notification effect is the same in relation to other effects (for example, FIG. 76(b), FIG. 77(a)).

In step S3912, after executing the process for rendering at the time of specific determination, it is determined in step S3913 whether or not a specific additional command has been received. If the specific addition command has been received, in step S3914, an effect setting process for performing an additional effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 76(b), on the auxiliary display section 65, "+20" or the like is displayed in correspondence with the number of additional games this time, so that the content of the current specific processing is displayed. It is possible for the player to clearly understand that it was an add-on process and the number of games added as a result of the add-on process.

If it is determined in step S3913 that the specific addition command has not been received, it is determined in step S3915 whether or not a subtraction command has been received. If a subtraction command has been received, in step S3916, effect setting processing for performing a subtraction effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As a subtraction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 77(a), on the auxiliary display section 65, "-20" or the like is displayed in correspondence with the current number of subtraction games, thereby indicating the content of the current specific processing. The player can clearly understand that the is a subtraction process and the number of games subtracted by the subtraction process.

The case where it is determined in step S3915 that a subtraction command has not been received means that an avoidance command has been received, and in this case, in step S3917, an avoidance effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for. For example, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the avoidance effect may be such that a ninja character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 so that the player can understand that execution of the specific process has been avoided. be done. Incidentally, the game in which the avoidance effect is performed is when the game is played with a bet number different from the specified specified number, and in this case, the limit effect is also executed as shown in FIG. 77(b).

After executing the process of step S3914, step S3916 or step S3917, in step S3918, a process of clearing the specific additional winning flag is executed, and then this specific determination effect setting process is ended. Note that if the specific additional winning flag is not set in step S3918, that state is maintained.

As described above, in this embodiment, the number of games is set in the specific determination area so that specific processing is performed during AT mode, and when the number of games set in the specific determination area is reached, the specific Since either addition processing or subtraction processing is performed as processing, the addition processing that increases the number of remaining games in AT mode can be performed even though there is a risk that the number of remaining games in AT mode will decrease. It is possible to make the user look forward to the game set in the specific determination area while also making the user look forward to it. Moreover, if you don't like that risk, you can avoid executing the specific process by playing a game set in the specific judgment area in a 2-bet game, etc. It becomes possible to realize an unprecedented and novel gameplay in which the player decides whether or not to execute a specific process based on the number of remaining games in AT mode and the risk.

Since the content of the next specific process can be ascertained in advance through the suggestive effect, it is possible to determine whether or not to avoid the specific process based on the suggestive effect. By doing so, it is possible to realize interesting gameplay that attracts the player's interest not only in the game in which the specific processing is performed but also in the previous games.

In addition, in the above configuration, the suggestion effect can occur only when the specific bonus lottery is won, but the suggestion effect can also occur even when the specific bonus lottery is not won. The occurrence rate may be higher when the specific bonus lottery is won than when the specific bonus lottery is not won.

As mentioned above, it is possible to avoid a specific process by simply switching the number of bets, so for example, even if you want to avoid a specific process, you may be unable to do so because it is difficult to perform the avoidance operation. Inconveniences that cannot be avoided are unlikely to occur. Therefore, it becomes possible for players to equally enjoy the above-mentioned novel gameplay regardless of their skill level.

In addition, after the number of games is set in the specific judgment area, and after the specific process is executed, the specific addition lottery is performed again to set the specific judgment area, so that these additions or subtractions are performed. The trigger will occur repeatedly during AT mode. Therefore, it can be expected that the AT mode will be more interesting and that the user will not get bored of the game more continuously.

The maximum number of additional games in the case of winning the specific additional lottery and the maximum number of subtraction games in the case of not winning the specific additional lottery is 50 games, and the games between the specific processing and the specific processing. Since the number of games is 10, which is smaller than the maximum number of games, it becomes a trigger game in which specific processing is performed in a shorter cycle, and the above-mentioned effect of not getting bored can be expected more favorably.

Moreover, the average number of games in the above-mentioned number of additional games and the average number of games in the number of subtracted games are 20 games, which are larger than the number of games between specific processes, so AT mode by specific process The range of fluctuation in the number of remaining games is greater than the number of games between specific processes, and the degree of influence on the number of remaining games between increasing and decreasing the number of remaining games in specific processes is large. Become. Therefore, interest in the specific processing is heightened, and it is possible to successfully improve the interest of the game.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) The specific processing related to the instruction function that can be executed when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in each area of the judgment information storage area 106f is the processing for starting the AT mode, and the processing for ending the CZ mode. The processing is not limited to processing such as processing for completing a special zone, processing for reaching the ceiling, processing for specific addition, processing for subtracting the number of games, etc. For example, it may be a process for ending AT mode or a process for starting CZ mode.

In the case of processing for ending the AT mode, for example, at the start of the AT mode, based on the number of continuous games in the AT mode, add the number of continuous games and the current number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the added number of games is It is preferable to set this in a corresponding area of the determination information storage area 106f, and execute the process for ending the AT mode when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of games set in the corresponding area. In this case, if the game that has reached the number of games set in the corresponding area is a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number, such as a 2-bet game, the process for ending the AT mode in the game Execution will be avoided. Therefore, for example, if a game is played with a specified number of bets after the game, by executing the process to end the AT mode, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the AT mode continuing indefinitely. becomes.

Also, for example, if the process for ending the AT mode is not executed in the game, the number of games for which the process for ending the AT mode should be performed when a game is played with a specified number of bets thereafter. It may also be configured to reset the . By doing this, it is possible to realize innovative gameplay such as how to continue the AT mode while avoiding games where there is a possibility of processing to end the AT mode with 2-bet games etc. can. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of numbers of games are set for executing the process for ending the AT mode. More specifically, for example, when starting AT mode, the number of games to be processed for ending AT mode is set as after 10 games, after 30 games, after 50 games, etc., and each of these games is set as 2 bets. By playing the game, it is possible to realize the gameplay of advancing the AT mode while bypassing the execution of the process for ending the AT mode. In this case, as in the fifth embodiment, the process for ending the AT mode is performed after 10 games, after 30 games, after 50 games, and so on. In this case, specific processing related to instruction functions with different advantages (for example, processing to notify the press order for transitioning the RT state) or other processing (for example, processing to generate a setting value suggestion effect) is performed. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the process to be executed is determined by lottery or the like. Even in this case, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the player selects whether to execute a specific process or avoid play in a 2-bet game after the 10 games. Alternatively, the number of games for which the plurality of AT mode termination processes can be executed as described above may be determined by lottery, so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the number of games. By doing so, it is possible to provide a thrilling feeling in which the AT mode is progressing without knowing when the process for ending the AT mode will be executed.

(2) Although the initial setting value (initial number of games) of each area in the judgment information storage area 106f is set to be a larger number of games than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500), it may be set as the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. . If the number of games in the advantageous section is the upper limit, the corresponding specific process is executed, but in the end, the process for forcibly ending the advantageous section is performed, so that the specific process does not substantially have any effect. Alternatively, the initial setting value may be a negative number of games. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which no number of games is input as an initial setting value.

(3) For example, when performing the process for starting AT mode, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the AT start determination area in a situation where the precursor flag is set, AT mode will be activated. Although the configuration is configured to execute the start process, regardless of the presence or absence of the precursor flag, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the AT start determination area, and the relevant game is executed. If the number is greater than or equal to the number, the configuration may be such that the process for starting the AT mode is executed. That is, the precursor flag is not an essential component in executing the specific processing regarding the instruction function when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f. However, in order for the CPU 102 to determine whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won, it is possible to use the precursor flag to determine that the number of games for which AT mode start processing is to be executed has been set in the AT start determination area. It is preferable to do so. Note that the number of games is not stored in the AT start determination area until the AT mode transition lottery is won, and by setting the number of games in the AT start determination area, after winning the AT mode transition lottery. The configuration may be such that the CPU 102 determines that there is such a value. In this case, if the number of games is set in the AT start determination area and the number of advantageous zone games AG is the number of games (or more) set in the AT start determination area, the AT mode start It is recommended that the configuration executes the following processing.

Incidentally, in each of the above embodiments, when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section also ends. If this is the case (the number of games is greater than or equal to the number of games), this is the state before the AT mode transition corresponding to the AT mode transition win that triggered the setting of the number of games in the AT start determination area. . However, in a configuration where the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends, if the AT mode is ended, initialization processing for the number of games in the AT start determination area (processing to set it to 1501) is executed. good.

(4) In the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery, the system is configured to transition to the specialized zone, but in addition to or instead of that, for example, the transition to the specialized zone can be performed based on a predetermined opportunity such as when AT mode starts. The number of transition games is set in a predetermined area in the determination information storage area 106f, and when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the number of games set in the predetermined area, a special process is performed as a process for specifying the instruction function. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to execute the process of transitioning to the zone. In this case, by setting the continuation of AT mode as a condition for executing the process of moving to the specialized zone until the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches the number of games set in the predetermined area, It is possible to realize gameplay in which the goal is set to the number of games set in a predetermined area, and when the goal is cleared, a benefit (additional specialization zone) is granted. In addition, when the execution condition for the process of moving to the specialized zone is that the AT mode continues, the advantageous section is also ended when the AT mode ends, and the number of games set in the predetermined area is initialized. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is not ended when the AT mode ends, the number of games set in the predetermined area may be initialized when the AT mode ends. Further, the number of games set in the predetermined area (target to reach in AT mode) is arbitrary, but for example, by setting it to 1000 games close to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (AT mode), such a game can be reached. By doing so, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which it is easier to continue playing up to the maximum number of games due to the benefit of the special add-on zone.

(5) The configuration may include an output means for externally outputting the number of games set in each area of the determination information storage area 106f from the main control device 101. In addition to the display control device 81, possible destinations for external output include a hall computer in a gaming hall, and a data display provided in each gaming machine or a plurality of gaming machines. For example, by configuring external output to the hall computer of a game hall, hall management can check whether specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function is being executed at a set number of games or at a number of games close to the set number of games. This allows the person to confirm the information. Therefore, acts of attempting to enjoy unfair profits by fraudulently avoiding execution of specific processing or causing specific processing to be performed without setting the number of games corresponding to the judgment information storage area 106f. If this occurs, the act can be easily discovered. Note that when a specific process related to the instruction function is executed, information to that effect and/or information on the processing result of the specific process related to the instruction function may also be output to the hall computer or the like.

(6) When initializing the advantageous section information, the AT start determination area, etc. is initialized (FIG. 42(b)). A configuration may also be adopted in which initialization processing is performed for the area. For example, when processing for starting AT mode is executed based on the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaching the number of games set in the AT start determination area, initialization processing for the AT start determination area is performed (1501 games are set). ) may also be configured.

(7) Although the first BB was provided as a BB that could be won in a 3-bet game, and the second BB was provided as a BB that could be won in a 2-bet game, it is also possible to use only one of the BBs, for example, It may be configured such that the second BB is won in the bet game, but none of the BBs are won in the 3-bet game.

(8) In the 2-bet game, the second BB is won, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which multiple types of BBs are won in the 2-bet game. For example, the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are won in the 2-bet game. It may be configured such that it is possible to win. In this case, the configuration is such that a 1st BB prize and a 2nd BB prize can be achieved in the 2-bet game, neither the 1st BB nor the 2nd BB can be won in the 3-bet game, and the 1st BB prize and the 2nd BB prize can be won in the 3-bet game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which neither the 2BB winning nor the 2BB winning is established. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed from that described above.

(9) Although the same lottery table is used in both the first BB state and the second BB state to provide the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to provide different net increase numbers.

(10) The first BB state and the second BB state are both played as a 3-bet game, but for example, the first BB state is played as a 3-bet game, and the second BB state is played as a 2-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as when the player plays a game using the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with a different number of bets than the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with a specified specified number of bets.

(11) In the games in the first BB state and the second BB state, the execution of instruction functions such as press order notification processing and specific processing is restricted, but for example, the games in the first BB state The presence or absence of restrictions may differ depending on the type of BB state, such as restricting the execution of processes related to these instruction functions, while allowing execution of processes related to these instruction functions in games in the second BB state. good. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state are provided, and in any or all of these states, processing related to each instruction function is limited or not limited.

(12) In a 3-bet game, a 2nd BB prize cannot be achieved, and in a 2-bet game, a 1st BB prize cannot be achieved, but in a 3-bet game, it is harder to win a 2nd BB prize than in a 2-bet game. It may be configured such that it is harder to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(13) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won.However, in a 3-bet game, it is possible to have a structure in which it is harder to win the 2nd BB than in a 2-bet game. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in a 3-bet game.

(14) An operation section that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of bets can be varied depending on the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, it may be configured such that if the operating section is operated once, the bet is 1 bet, if the operating section is operated twice, the bet is 2 bets, and when the operating section is operated 3 times, the bet is 3 bets. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it becomes 1 bet, and when you operate 5 times, it becomes 2 bets, etc. Even if you exceed the desired number of bets, you can set the desired number of bets by re-operating. It would be good to have a possible configuration.

(15) The main control device 101 performs a process of setting the number of games in which the specific processing related to the instruction function is executed in the judgment information storage area 106f, and the main control device 101 stores the judgment information The configuration is such that when the number of games set in the area 106f is reached, a specific process related to the corresponding instruction function is executed, but the control device that sets the number of games and the control device that executes the specific process are different controls. It may be a device. For example, the main control device 101 performs a process of setting the number of games in which a specific process related to the instruction function is to be executed in the judgment information storage area 106f, while setting the number of advantageous section games AG in the judgment information storage area 106f. When the number of games is reached, a command to that effect may be output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may perform specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function.

(16) Modes such as continuous performance and suggestive performance are merely examples, and other performance modes may be used. For example, regarding the continuous performance, although the configuration is such that the result performance of the victory performance or the defeat performance is executed in the end, a configuration may be adopted in which the continuous performance may end without performing any result performance. In this case, if the AT mode transition is won, the victory performance will be executed based on the fact that the confirmed performance was executed before the game in which the victory performance was executed (the performance pattern of the confirmed performance was selected). The continuous performance may be terminated without any change, and if the AT mode transition is not won, the continuous performance may be ended without executing the defeat performance.

(17) As the number of precursory games, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of games than those mentioned above is selected, or a configuration in which a shorter number of games is selected. In addition, with the winning of the transition to AT mode and the winning of transition to CZ mode, a continuous performance is performed for the number of precursory games and the number of continuous games in CZ mode, but the continuous performance will not start after a predetermined precursory performance. A configuration may also be used.

(18) If a game is played with a number of bets other than the specified specified number, a limited effect is executed for each game, but from a game with a specified specified number of bets, the number of bets other than the specified specified number is While a limited effect is executed in a game that has been switched to a game with a number of bets other than the specific regulation number, in subsequent games, even if the game is played with a bet number other than the specific regulation number, if the game with a bet number other than the specific regulation number continues. A configuration may also be adopted in which no restriction effect is performed. Further, in a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number, whether or not to execute a limited performance may be determined by lottery.

(19) In the case where an AT mode transition lottery is held based on a specific combination, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, you will be transferred to the specialized zone and the game will be played until the process for starting AT mode is performed. It is more advantageous for the player to play with a specified number of bets than to play with a number of bets other than the specified number of bets, but at least it is possible to win the AT mode transfer lottery based on a specific combination. In the predetermined game from 1 to 1 until the process for starting the AT mode is performed, it becomes more advantageous for the player to play the game with a specified specified number of bets than to play with a bet other than the specified specified number. For example, in such a predetermined game, a setting value suggestion performance may be more likely to occur when the game is played with a specified number of bets than when played with a bet number other than the specified specified number.

In addition, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the AT mode promotion lottery (promotion lottery from the first AT mode to the second AT mode) can be executed in the game until the process for starting the AT mode is performed. good. In this case, the promotion lottery for the AT mode may be executed in games with a specified number of bets, but not executed in games with bets other than the specified specified number.

(20) If you win the AT mode transition lottery, we assumed a configuration in which the gaming state will not shift unless a BB win occurs until the process for starting the AT mode is performed, but the predetermined replay result and It is also possible to provide a configuration in which RT states with different probabilities are provided, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the process for starting the AT mode is performed after the RT state transition occurs. In this case, notification of the push order at the time of winning a transition winning combination that causes a transition to the RT state can be executed in games with a specified specified number of bets, but cannot be executed in games with bets other than the specified specified number. After winning the AT mode transition lottery, it becomes necessary to play a predetermined game with a specified prescribed number of bets at least until the process for starting the AT mode is performed.

(21) When the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f, if the game is a game with a bet number other than the specified number, processing for ending the CZ mode or special Regarding the process for ending the CZ zone, set the CZ end flag and the specialization end flag, and then, when a game with a specified number of bets is played, check the judgment information storage area 106f. The configuration is such that the process for ending CZ mode and the process for ending specialized zone are executed by checking these CZ end flags and specialization end flags, but unlike the process for starting AT mode, specific After confirming that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f in a game with a specified number of bets, specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(22) Although the configuration is configured in which the specific processing related to the instruction function is executed using the advantageous section game number AG and the judgment information storage area 106f, in addition to or in place of the advantageous section game number AG, for example, a game hall The configuration may also be configured to execute specific processing regarding the instruction function by using the number of games since the store opened, the total number of games since the game machine was shipped from the factory, and the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f. good.

(23) Although the configuration is such that the number of advantageous section games AG and the judgment information storage area 106f are used to execute the specific processing regarding the instruction function, for example, the number of advantageous section games AG and the judgment information storage area 106f are In addition to or in place of the specific processing related to the instruction function, for example, processing related to a predetermined effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect), processing related to an advantageous section (for example, processing for ending an advantageous section), and each reel 32L. , 32M, 32R, processing for changing the lottery table of each game, etc. may be configured.

(24) The number of games set in each area of the determination information storage area 106f and the specific processing related to the instruction function were associated in a one-to-one relationship. When the number of games set in the corresponding area of the determination information storage area 106f is reached, the content of the specific process related to the instruction function is determined by lottery, and the specific process of the content corresponding to the lottery result is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(25) Although the configuration has been described in which the probability of winning the additional lottery increases by moving to the specialized zone, in addition to or in place of this, a configuration may also be adopted in which the number of additional games when winning the additional lottery is increased.

(26) If you win the AT mode transfer lottery, you will always be transferred to the specialized zone. However, after the transfer to the specialized zone lottery, if you win the transfer lottery, you will be transferred to the specialized zone. Good too. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the continuous performance is performed when moving to the specialized zone, but the continuous performance is not performed when not moving to the specialized zone.

(27) Although the number of games in the CZ mode and the specialized zone is set to 10 games uniformly, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(28) While the number of games in CZ mode is set to 10 games uniformly, the number of precursor games in the event of winning the AT mode transition lottery is determined by lottery, and the AT start judgment area is determined by the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery. Although the configuration is such that the number of games set in the AT start determination area and the CZ end determination area can be different, a common number of games may be set in the AT start determination area and the CZ end determination area regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not. .

(29) In the case where the AT mode shift is won, the player immediately moves to the specialized zone, but it is also possible to shift to the specialized zone after a predetermined number of games after the AT mode shift is won. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery.

(30) If a player does not win to move to AT mode and wins to move to CZ mode, the player will immediately move to CZ mode. The configuration may be such that the mode is shifted to the CZ mode. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery.

(31) Executed when the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f is reached in a game a predetermined number of games before reaching the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f. It is also possible to perform a notification corresponding to the content of the specific process. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, in a configuration in which the process for starting the AT mode is not executed unless the number of games set in the AT start determination area is played with a specified number of bets, the AT mode start process is executed. It is also possible to call attention to prevent the first BB winning or the second BB winning by giving advance notice in a game a predetermined number of games before the number of games set in the start determination area. In this case, by setting the predetermined number of games to be greater than or equal to the number of consecutive games in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning can be achieved, and before it is too late, the above-mentioned 1BB The significance of calling attention to prevent winning or second BB winning is ensured.

(32) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state was set to about +0.00 medals, and the number of medals neither increased nor decreased in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, A configuration may be adopted in which the number of medals can be increased, or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase in the number of coins in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least larger than the net increase in the number of coins in the case of playing a 3-bet game in the internal state and the non-internal state.

(33) In the fifth embodiment, the period for executing the specific determination process may be made random. Specifically, when the specific judgment content setting process is executed, the number of games obtained by uniformly adding 10 to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is set in the specific judgment area, but the value determined by lottery etc. may be added to the number of advantageous section games AG, and the value may be set in the specific determination area.

(34) When the player plays an internal state or a non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or achieves a 1st BB prize or a 2nd BB prize, execution of each process related to the instruction function is permitted. However, on the gaming machine side, for example, when a predetermined number of games are played, execution of each process related to the instruction function is transitioned from a state where execution is permitted to a state where it is restricted. You can also use it as

(35) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(36) Although a description has been given of a slot machine that includes three reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine that includes five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(37) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, the slot machine may be a gaming machine (a so-called reel-type gaming machine using balls) that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

(38) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by inserting medals as game media and setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a benefit corresponding to winnings in the game. However, this does not negate medalless type gaming machines that do not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, it is possible to start playing by setting the number of bets for a game using virtual gaming media (predetermined gaming value), and the above-mentioned benefits corresponding to winnings in the game are provided. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) is provided according to a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of virtual game media is displayed on a predetermined display section, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also a pachinko machine of an enclosed type in which game balls are not discharged outside the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, it is preferable to have a structure that notifies information indicating the number of prize balls, for example.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means (the main controller 101 executes a lottery process) that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a bonus to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a gaming value imparting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that imparts a predetermined number of gaming values as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification executable by a predetermined notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed,
a game number grasping means (number of advantageous period games AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
In the advantageous state, if a predetermined specific opportunity (AT mode transition winning, AT mode transition non-winning) occurs, specific processing related to the mode notification by the mode notification means (process for starting AT mode, CZ mode Correspondence information setting means (for example, the AT by the main controller 101 (a function that executes processing such as setting the number of games in the start determination area and the CZ end determination area);
Specifying that the specific processing can be executed when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches a specific number as the planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area. Processing execution means (a function of the main controller 101 to execute processing for starting AT mode and processing for ending CZ mode);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and the expectation is created for the transition to the advantageous state. You can play games while playing the game. In addition, this gaming machine is configured to execute a specific process related to the mode notification when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, so depending on the content of the specific process, the player may You can also make them look forward to it. In this case, when a specific trigger occurs, the corresponding information is set in the determination area so that the specific process is executed, so in a configuration where the specific process is subsequently executed based on the specific trigger, if the specific trigger occurs. There is no need to remember the information until the specific process is executed, and by knowing the presence or absence of the corresponding information, it is possible to know whether the specific trigger has already occurred or to execute the specific process even after the specific trigger has occurred. It is now possible to judge whether the current situation is the previous one or whether a specific process should be executed, etc., using only the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means and the corresponding information in the judgment area. Simplification can be achieved.

Feature A2. At least a first game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and execution of the specific process by the specific process execution device are permitted (a game with a specified prescribed number of bets depending on the gaming state); a second game in which execution of the specific process by the mode notification and the specific process execution means is restricted (a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number according to the gaming state);
is set,
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the number of games grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game.

According to the above configuration, since the first game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing are allowed and the second game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing are restricted are set, for example, the game Depending on the progress situation, it is possible to allow the player to play the game as designed using the mode notification, such as switching to the second game in a situation where the mode notification should not be performed.

On the other hand, since the number of games in an advantageous state is grasped by the number-of-games grasping means, including both the first game and the second game, for example, the mode notification is executed in the second game. Even if this is avoided, the counting of the number of games up to a specific number continues. In other words, the number of games played until the specific process is executed, including the number of games played in the second game, is grasped. Since the execution of specific processing is also limited in the second game, the first It becomes possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the game progresses while switching between the game and the second game.

Feature A3. A means capable of grasping in the second game that the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means has reached the specific number (the number of advantageous section games AG is determined by the processing for determining a specific area by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to feature A2, further comprising a function of determining whether the number of games set in each area of the game information storage area 106f has been reached.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where execution of a specific process is restricted even if a specific number is reached in the second game, the fact that the specific number has been reached is not recognized even in the second game. Ru. By doing this, it is possible to inform the player that the execution of a specific process is restricted, and for example, after reaching a specific number, it is possible to reach the specific number for the first time when the first game is performed. Compared to a configuration in which it is possible to understand what has happened, there is a grace period for processing and notification after understanding, so it is also possible to avoid a temporary increase in the processing load.

Feature A4. Equipped with bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for the game,
The lottery means is configured to perform the lottery according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means,
The expected increase number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the gaming value awarded by the gaming value assigning means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, is greater than the second game than the first game. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the gaming machine is set so that the price of the game is higher.

According to the above configuration, although no mode notification or specific processing is performed in the second game, the number of expected increases in the gaming value per game is greater than in the first game, so for example, There may also be situations where it is more advantageous for the player to play the game in the second game. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably realize a gaming experience that utilizes switching between the first game and the second game.

Feature A5. Terminating means for ending the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit (the upper limit number of games determined by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing for ending the advantageous section based on the arrival of the advantageous section),
Initialization means that executes predetermined initialization processing (a function that executes initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101);
Equipped with
Features A1 to A4 characterized in that when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, information corresponding to a number of games that is greater than the upper limit number is set as initial information in the determination area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, since the initial information of the determination area is set to information corresponding to the number of games that is greater than the upper limit number of advantageous states, the specific process is executed without a specific opportunity occurring in the advantageous state. It is possible to suitably avoid this.

Feature A6. As the specific opportunity, at least a first specific opportunity (AT mode transition winning) and a second specific opportunity (AT mode transition non-winning) are set,
The correspondence information setting means includes:
In the advantageous state, when the first specific opportunity occurs, the first scheduled number of games for executing the first specific process (process for starting AT mode) as the specific process is stored in the determination area (AT start determination a first correspondence information setting means (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101);
In the advantageous state, when the second specific opportunity (non-winning to transition to AT mode) occurs, a second specific process (processing for ending CZ mode) different from the first specific process is executed as the specific process. A second correspondence information setting means (for example, a process of setting the number of games in the CZ termination determination area by the main controller 101) sets the second scheduled number of games to be played as correspondence information in the determination area (CZ termination determination area). function) and
Equipped with
The specific processing execution means is
When the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means becomes the first specified number as the first planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the first specified a first specific processing execution means (a function for executing processing for starting the AT mode by the main control device 101) capable of executing the processing;
When the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means becomes a second specific number as the second planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the second specific number is determined. a second specific processing execution means (a function for executing processing for ending the CZ mode by the main control device 101) capable of executing the processing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific opportunity and the second specific opportunity occur, the first scheduled number of games and the second scheduled number of games are respectively stored as specific information, and the number of games in an advantageous state becomes the first specific number. If the number reaches the second specific number, the first specific process is executed, and if the second specific number is reached, the second specific process is executed. In this way, by making it clear that the content of the specific process and the number of games to be executed are not the same, it becomes possible to realize more diverse gaming features with a simpler configuration.

Feature A7. The determination area in which the first correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information and the determination area in which the second correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information are a common determination area. The gaming machine described in feature A6.

According to the above configuration, since a common determination area is used, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a determination area is used for each specific process.

Feature A8. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the first correspondence information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the second correspondence information setting means have a common number of games. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first specific process and the second specific process are performed in the same game in an advantageous state. In this way, by allowing multiple types of specific processing to be performed in the same game, the degree of freedom in the configuration is increased, allowing multiple types of specific processing to be executed by setting each corresponding information in the determination area. Significantly improved.

Feature A9. Advantage determination means that executes an advantage determination as to whether or not an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player will occur (a function for executing an AT mode shift lottery by the main controller 101, and a function for executing a specific additional lottery process by the main controller 101) function),
The first specific opportunity occurs when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a corresponding result corresponding to causing the advantageous event,
Any one of features A6 to A8 characterized in that the second specific opportunity occurs when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, whether the first specific process is executed or the second specific event occurs depends on whether the result of the advantageous determination is correct or not. In other words, if the result of an advantageous determination is a corresponding result, correspondence information corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is set in the determination area and the first identification process is performed, and the result of an advantageous determination is a non-compatible result. If so, correspondence information corresponding to the second scheduled number of games is set in the determination area and the second specifying process is performed. In this way, by changing the correspondence information set in the determination area depending on the result of one favorable determination, the determination area is associated with the favorable determination in a one-to-one relationship, and the determination area is It is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which a plurality of pieces of correspondence information are set overlappingly in an area.

Feature A10. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed or the probability of execution is improved;
When the result of the advantageous determination executed based on a predetermined trigger result (specific combination) as a lottery result by the lottery means is the corresponding result, the first specific process is performed and the notification state is changed. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the gaming machine has a configuration that allows the transition.

According to the above configuration, an advantageous determination is made by the lottery result by the lottery means serving as a trigger result, and when the advantageous determination is won, a transition to the notification state occurs as the first specifying process. In other words, the trigger result is a sign that a transition to the notification state may occur. Therefore, even in a configuration in which correspondence information is set in the determination area to cause a transition to the notification state, the trigger for setting the correspondence information is easy to understand, and the player can easily understand when the trigger for setting the correspondence information occurs. After that, I started playing the game with great anticipation. Therefore, the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the first specifying process is a process for starting the notification state.

According to the above configuration, when the trigger result is an advantageous determination, the corresponding information corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is set, and when the first specified number corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is reached, the notification status is A transition to can occur. Therefore, by increasing interest in the game from the trigger result to the transition to the notification state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the information set as the determination information.

Feature A12. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed or the probability of execution is improved;
When the result of the advantageous determination executed based on a predetermined trigger result (specific combination) as a lottery result by the lottery means is the non-corresponding result, a transition to the notification state is likely to occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to execute a process of transitioning to the high transition state and ending the high transition state as the second specifying process.

According to the above configuration, an advantageous determination is made when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a trigger result, and when the advantageous determination is not made, the transition to the high transition state in which transition to the notification state is likely to occur, and then, As the second specifying process, a process for terminating the high transition state is performed. In other words, the trigger result not only triggers the transition to the high transition state, but also triggers the end of the high transition state. By doing so, even if the player does not win the advantageous judgment, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the game.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to feature A10, if an advantageous determination based on a trigger result is won, the transition is made to the notification state, and if an advantageous determination based on the trigger result is not won, the transition to the notification state is made. It becomes possible to realize a configuration such as shifting to a transition state by using the correspondence information set in the determination area. Therefore, such gameplay can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A13. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed or the probability of execution is improved;
Feature A9 is characterized in that, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is the corresponding result, the first specifying process is performed and the number of continuous games in the notification state increases. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first specifying process corresponds to a so-called additional process that increases the number of continuous games in the notification state. In other words, if the advantageous determination is won, the notification state will be difficult to end, and a favorable event for the player will occur. With regard to such gameplay, if a configuration in which correspondence information is set in the determination area is used, it is possible to realize the gameplay with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A14. Feature A13 is characterized in that when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is the non-compatible result, the second specifying process is performed and the number of continuous games in the notification state is reduced. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the second specifying process is a process of reducing the number of continuous games in the notification state. In this case, if the winning result is determined to be advantageous, the notification state is likely to end, and an undesirable event for the player will occur. With regard to such gameplay, if a configuration in which correspondence information is set in the determination area is used, it is possible to realize the gameplay with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A15. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the first correspondence information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the second correspondence information setting means have a common number of games. It shows
The number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the first specific number and the second specific number, and each specific processing by the first specific processing execution means and the second specific processing execution means The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A14, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a corresponding specific process is executed in a possible game in which execution of the following is possible.

According to the above configuration, the first specific opportunity occurs when an advantageous determination based on the trigger result is won, and the second specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous determination is not won, regardless of the outcome of the advantageous determination. , the configuration is such that either the first specific process or the second specific process is performed for a common number of games. By doing this, in the game after the trigger result is reached until the first specified number or the second specified number is reached, it is possible to predict the result of an advantageous judgment and increase the attention to the game. , it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the attention level with a relatively simple configuration.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even if the first specific process and the second specific process are not executed in a game where the first specific number or the second specific number is reached, the first specific process or the second specific process Since the corresponding specific process is executed in a game in which the process can be executed, it is possible to prevent an event in which the specific process is not executed forever.

Feature A16. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the first correspondence information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set by the second correspondence information setting means have a common number of games. It shows
If the specific game in which the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means corresponds to the first specific number and the second specific number is a predetermined first game, the first specific processing While each specific process is executed by the execution means and the second specific process execution unit, when the specific game is a second game different from the first game, the first specific process execution unit and the second specific process The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A14, characterized in that each specific process by the process execution means is avoided.

According to the above configuration, the first specific opportunity occurs when an advantageous determination based on the trigger result is won, and the second specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous determination is not won, regardless of the outcome of the advantageous determination. , the configuration is such that either the first specific process or the second specific process is performed for a common number of games. By doing this, in the game after the trigger result is reached until the first specified number or the second specified number is reached, it is possible to predict the result of an advantageous judgment and increase the attention to the game. , it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the attention level with a relatively simple configuration.

Moreover, in the above configuration, if the first specific process or the second specific process is not executed in a game where the first specific number or the second specific number is reached, the specific process is avoided from being executed. Therefore, depending on the contents of the first specific process and the second specific process, it is possible to realize not only a game that executes these specific processes, but also a game that avoids the execution of these specific processes. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the advantageous determination based on the trigger result.

Note that the invention described in features A1 to A16 above is based on ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of features A1 to A16 above, the technical characteristics shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is also possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a gaming value imparting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that imparts a predetermined number of gaming values as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed,
a game number grasping means (number of advantageous period games AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
When the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches a specific number, specific processing execution means (main controller 101);
Equipped with
At least a first game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and execution of the specific process by the specific process execution device are permitted (a game with a specified prescribed number of bets depending on the gaming state); a second game in which execution of the specific process by the mode notification and the specific process execution means is restricted (a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number according to the gaming state);
is set,
The number of games grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches the specific number in the second game, execution of the specific processing by the specific processing execution means is made to wait until the first game is played. It is characterized by being equipped with a standby means (a function for executing processing for starting the AT mode after the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games in the AT start judgment area in the AT start game judgment process by the main controller 101). A gaming machine that does.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and the expectation is created for the transition to the advantageous state. You can play games while playing the game. Furthermore, this gaming machine is configured to execute specific processing related to mode notification when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, so depending on the content of the specific processing performed when the specific number is reached, , it is also possible to make the player look forward to reaching the specific number.

Here, in this gaming machine, since a first game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing is permitted and a second game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing are restricted, for example, Depending on the progress of the game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game as designed using the mode notification, such as switching to the second game in a situation where the mode notification should not be performed.

However, while the number of games played in an advantageous state is grasped by the number of games grasping means, the number of games grasping means is configured to grasp the number of games including both the first game and the second game. Therefore, when a specific number is reached in the second game, the specific process cannot be executed in the game in which the specific number is reached. Therefore, this gaming machine is equipped with a standby means, so that execution of the specific process is waited until the first game. Regardless, it is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience that the specific process is no longer performed due to the second game being played.

Feature B2. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, correspondence information corresponding to the specific number is displayed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). A corresponding information setting means for setting (for example, a function for executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101),
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to the above configuration, since the correspondence information is set in the determination area when a specific trigger occurs, there is no need to remember that the specific trigger has occurred until the execution of the specific process, and the presence or absence of the corresponding information is not required. By understanding this, it becomes possible to determine that a specific trigger has already occurred. Furthermore, by executing specific processing if the number of games in an advantageous state is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in the determination area, it is possible to check not only whether a specific opportunity has occurred, but also whether a specific opportunity has occurred. The correspondence between the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means and the judgment area indicates that the situation is before the execution of specific processing or the situation in which specific processing should be executed after the occurrence of It becomes possible to make a judgment based only on information, and the effect of feature A1 can be expected while simplifying the configuration.

Feature B3. Terminating means for ending the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit (the upper limit number of games determined by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing for ending the advantageous section based on the arrival of the advantageous section),
Initialization means that executes predetermined initialization processing (a function that executes initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101);
Equipped with
When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, information corresponding to a number of games that is greater than the upper limit number is set as initial information in the determination area. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the initial information of the determination area is set to information corresponding to the number of games that is greater than the upper limit number of advantageous states, the specific process is executed without a specific opportunity occurring in the advantageous state. It is possible to suitably avoid this.

Feature B4. The specific processing execution means is
a first specific processing execution means (a function for executing processing for starting the AT mode by the main controller 101) that executes a first specific processing as the specific processing;
a second specific processing execution means (a function for executing processing for CZ termination by the main controller 101) that executes a second specific processing different from the first specific processing as the specific processing;
Equipped with
The correspondence information setting means includes:
When a first specific opportunity (AT mode transition winning) occurs as the specific opportunity, first correspondence information as the correspondence information is set in a first determination area (AT start determination area) of the determination areas. a first correspondence information setting means (a function for executing processing for setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101);
When a second specific opportunity (CZ mode shift winning) different from the first specific opportunity occurs as the specific opportunity, a second determination area (different from the first determination area) of the determination areas ( a second correspondence information setting means (a function for executing a process of setting the number of games in the CZ termination determination area by the main controller 101) for setting second correspondence information as the correspondence information in the CZ termination determination area;
Equipped with
The first specific processing execution means executes the first specific processing when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the first correspondence information. ,
The second specific processing execution means executes the second specific processing when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the second correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3.

According to the above configuration, by providing multiple types of determination areas, when the number of games in an advantageous state becomes the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in each determination area, the corresponding specific process is executed. Even if the configuration is such that a plurality of types of specific processing are executed with different numbers of games, it is possible to expect the effect with a relatively simple configuration like feature B2.

Feature B5. An event advantageous to the player occurs due to the first specific processing being performed,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein an event disadvantageous to the player or an event less advantageous to the player than when the first specifying process is performed occurs due to the second specifying process being performed.

According to the above configuration, the first specific process and the second specific process are processes for causing events that have completely different advantages for the player, and even if such processes are mutually related, the feature B4 By using a plurality of determination areas as described above, it becomes possible to perform each process in parallel while using the number of games grasped by the same number of games grasping means.

Feature B6. A means capable of grasping in the second game that the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means has reached the specific number (the number of advantageous section games AG is determined by the processing for determining a specific area by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function for determining whether the number of games set in each area of the game information storage area 106f has been reached.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games reaches a specific number in the second game, execution of the specific process is waited until the first game, and the fact that the number reaches the specific number itself does not occur in the second game. Even if there is, it will be understood. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that execution of a specific process is being waited for, and for example, after reaching a specific number, the specific number is not executed until the first game is performed. Compared to a configuration in which it is possible to understand that the process has been reached, there is a grace period to execute the specific process in the first game, so the temporary increase in the processing load when performing the specific process is avoided. It is also possible to avoid it.

Feature B7. When it is determined that the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means has reached the specific number, the specific information storage means for storing specific information (for example, executes a process of setting a CZ end flag by the main controller 101) function),
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing when the first game is executed in a situation where the specific information is stored.

According to the above configuration, by storing the specific information when a specific number is reached in the second game, it is only necessary to check the specific information in the first game, and once again the number of games is the specific number. There is no need to judge whether or not the situation has been reached. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process in performing the specific process.

Feature B8. When the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number, a special notification means (a function for executing a rotation performance process by the main control device 101, a display (a function of executing a process for performing a result performance in the continuous performance process by the control device 81),
The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a common notification mode when the specific number is reached in the first game and when the specific number is reached in the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether execution of the specific process is waited for or not, the notification mode of the special notification that is executed when the number of games in an advantageous state reaches a specific number is the same. By doing so, there is no need for complicated processing for adjusting the notification mode of special notification based on the fact that execution of the specific processing is on standby, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature B9. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, correspondence information corresponding to the specific number is displayed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). A corresponding information setting means for setting (for example, a function for executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101),
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area. It is configured to
This gaming machine is
a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the number of games grasping means, the correspondence information setting means, and the specific processing execution means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means;
It has
When the correspondence information is set by the correspondence information setting means, the first control device outputs correspondence number information corresponding to the number of games up to the specific number to the second control device (main control device). 101),
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the special notification means is configured to execute the special notification based on the correspondence number information output from the output means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, the corresponding information is set on the first control device side, and the specific processing execution means sets the corresponding information based on the number of games and the corresponding information grasped by the number of games grasping means. The configuration is such that the specific processing is performed, and the second control device that makes the special notification executes the special notification based on the corresponding number information output from the first control device when the corresponding information is set. Therefore, when making a special notification, there is no need for a configuration that determines whether the number of games has reached a specific number after a specific opportunity occurs until the specific number is reached. In other words, regardless of whether the game up to a specific number is the first game or the second game, if the configuration is such that a special notification is executed based on the corresponding number information received when a specific opportunity occurs, unnecessary It becomes possible to execute special notification in a game where specific processing is scheduled to be performed without adding any configuration.

Feature B10. The first control device includes:
A means capable of grasping in the second game that the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means has reached the specific number (the number of advantageous section games AG is determined by the processing for determining a specific area by the main control device 101) (a function to execute a process for determining that the number of games set in each area of the information storage area 106f has been reached);
a specific notification means (a function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific notification (rotation effect) when the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification in a game in which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification unit.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, even if the game that reached that number is the second game, the first control device side executes a specific notification, and the second control device side executes a specific notification. Special notification is executed. In such a configuration, the first control device side performs specific notification using the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means, and the second control device side performs specific notification based on the corresponding number information output from the first control device side. In order to make special notifications based on the system, by dividing each function between multiple control devices, it is possible to synchronize each notification performed by multiple control devices while avoiding a local increase in processing load. It becomes possible.

Feature B11. It is equipped with an advantage determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination of causing an advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous for the player,
The specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the advantageous event,
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information based on the result of the favorable determination by the advantageous determination means being a correspondence result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The special notification means executes a predetermined notification (attack performance and attacked performance in continuous performance) over a plurality of games based on the correspondence number information, and then executes a game that reaches the specific number based on the correspondence number information. The configuration is such that the special notification is executed based on the information,
If the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-corresponding result corresponding to not causing the advantageous event, the predetermined notification is executed, and the result of the advantageous determination that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification is A second special notification means (display) that executes notification corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous determination is the non-correspondence result in games corresponding to the specific number in which the specific processing is executed if the corresponding result is the non-correspondence result; (a function of executing a continuous performance based on a pseudo-harbinger performance table by the control device 81),
The special notification means and the second special notification means are capable of executing the predetermined notification and the special notification in common in both the first game and the second game. The gaming machine according to B9 or feature B10.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the judgment result by the advantageous judgment means is notified in a so-called continuous performance such as a special notification after a predetermined notification, even if the result of the advantageous judgment is a win, it is not a non-win. However, a similar continuous performance is performed until the middle of the movie. In these continuous performances, a common continuous performance is executed regardless of whether the first game or the second game is played, so no matter which game is played, a specific number of This structure affects the number of games played until the number of games is reached, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a discrepancy between the execution timing of the specific process and the continuous performance, and whether or not the winning decision was made in an advantageous manner will affect the number of games played until the specific number is reached. It becomes difficult to understand.

Feature B12. Means for making the special notification executed by the special notification means when the specific number is reached in the second game wait at least until the next game is played in the first game (each by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process for continuing the AT notification performance until the game in which the AT start performance is executed.

The case where special notification is performed in the second game means that the number of games in an advantageous state has reached a specific number, although the specific process has not been executed. That is, this is a case where the specific process is executed after that by playing the first game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making the executed special notification continue until the first game is played, both the game that reaches a specific number and the game where a specific process is performed. This is a configuration in which special notifications are associated. If the special notification is not continued until the execution of the specific process, the player may mistakenly think that the right to perform the specific process has disappeared due to the end of the special notification. In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to easily make the user understand that the execution of the specific process is being carried over.

Feature B13. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, correspondence information corresponding to the specific number is displayed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). A correspondence information setting means to be set (for example, a function to execute a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101),
Advantage determining means (a function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for determining the advantage of causing an advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous for the player;
Equipped with
The specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the advantageous event,
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information based on the result of the favorable determination by the advantageous determination means being a correspondence result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
If the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a non-correspondence result different from the corresponding result, means capable of shifting the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means to a highly advantageous state in which the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is likely to become the corresponding result; A function for executing transition processing to CZ mode by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is executed in the first game but not in the second game.

According to the above configuration, when an advantageous judgment is won, corresponding information is set in the judgment area, and when a specific number is reached, a specific process for causing an advantageous event is executed. If this happens, the game may shift to a highly advantageous state in which it is easier to win an advantageous determination, and moreover, the advantageous determination is not executed in the second game. Then, after an advantageous judgment is made, if the games up to a certain number are played in the second game, the high advantageous state that would be entered if the result of the previous advantageous judgment was a non-winning A certain number of people will reach a certain number without being able to benefit from the above. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to play the games up to the specific number after the advantageous determination is made as the first game, including the case where the result of the advantageous determination is non-winning. By doing so, after the correspondence information is set in the determination area, it becomes difficult to play the second game, and it becomes easier to execute the specific process in the games that reach a specific number.

Feature B14. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, correspondence information corresponding to the specific number is displayed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). A correspondence information setting means to be set (for example, a function to execute a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101),
a first advantageous determination means (a function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that executes a first advantageous determination of causing a first advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous to the player;
After the first advantageous event occurs, a second advantageous determination is made to cause a second advantageous event (AT addition) that is different from the first advantageous event and is advantageous to the player. Advantage determining means (a function for executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the first advantageous event,
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information based on the fact that the result of the first advantageous determination by the first advantageous determination means is a first correspondence result corresponding to the occurrence of the first advantageous event. It is a thing,
When the result of the first advantageous determination by the first advantageous determination means is the first corresponding result, the result of the second advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the first corresponding result that causes the second advantageous event. Equipped with a means (a function of executing the transition process to the specialized zone by the main controller 101) that can transition to a highly advantageous state that is likely to result in a 2 response result,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the second advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is executed in the first game but not in the second game. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the first advantageous determination is won, the corresponding information is set in the determination area, and when a specific number is reached, a specific process for causing the first advantageous event is executed. If you win the advantageous judgment, you may shift to a high advantageous state where it becomes easier to win the second advantageous judgment of causing a second advantageous event different from the first advantageous event, and furthermore, in the second game, The second advantageous determination is not executed. Then, after the first advantageous determination is made, if the games up to a certain number are played in the second game, the transition will proceed as if the result of the first advantageous determination was a win. You will reach a certain number without being able to benefit from the high advantageous state. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to play the games from when the first advantage determination is made until the specific number is reached as the first game. By doing so, after the correspondence information is set in the determination area, it becomes difficult to play the second game, and it becomes easier to execute the specific process in the games that reach a specific number.

Feature B15. Equipped with bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for the game,
The lottery means is configured to perform the lottery according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means,
The expected increase number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the gaming value awarded by the gaming value assigning means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, is greater than the second game than the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that the game is set to be more expensive.

According to the above configuration, although no mode notification or specific processing is performed in the second game, the number of expected increases in the gaming value per game is greater than in the first game, so for example, There may also be situations where it is more advantageous for the player to play the game in the second game. In other words, a situation may arise in which a specific process cannot be performed in a game in which a specific number of players has been reached. By applying the configuration of feature B1 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience caused by not being able to perform specific processing in the second game.

The invention described in features B1 to B15 above is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of features B1 to B15 above, the technical characteristics shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9. It is also possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means (the main controller 101 executes a lottery process) that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a bonus to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a gaming value imparting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that imparts a predetermined number of gaming values as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed,
a game number grasping means (number of advantageous period games AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, the planned number of games for which the specific process related to the mode notification (specific process related to the instruction function) by the mode notification means is executed. , a correspondence information setting means that sets the correspondence information in a predetermined determination area (for example, the AT start determination area) (for example, a function that executes a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101, etc.) )and,
Specifying that the specific processing can be executed when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches a specific number as the planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area. Processing execution means (a function of the main controller 101 to execute processing for starting AT mode, processing for ending CZ mode, processing for ending specialized zone, etc.);
Avoidance means (main controller 101 (a function that does not execute the corresponding specific process when the game in which the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f is not a game with a specific prescribed number of bets); ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and the expectation is created for the transition to the advantageous state. You can play games while playing the game. Furthermore, this gaming machine is configured to execute specific processing related to mode notification when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, so depending on the content of the specific processing performed when the specific number is reached, , it is also possible to make the player look forward to reaching the specific number. In this case, when a specific opportunity occurs, correspondence information is set in the determination area so that when the number of games in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, specific processing related to mode notification will be executed. In a configuration in which a specific process is subsequently executed, there is no need to remember that a specific trigger has occurred until the specific process is executed, and the presence or absence of the corresponding information can be determined after the specific trigger has already occurred. , the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means, and the fact that the situation is after the specific opportunity has occurred but before executing the specific process, that the situation is such that the specific process should be executed, etc. It becomes possible to make a judgment using only the correspondence information of the judgment area, and the configuration can be simplified.

Furthermore, when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, a specific process related to the mode notification is executed, and when the number of games played reaches a specific number, the player is identified. Since it is equipped with an avoidance means that can avoid the execution of a specific process based on the operation, the player can decide whether or not to perform a specific operation based on the content of the specific process, providing novel gameplay. can be realized. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the specific process is executed based on the correspondence information set in the determination area and the number of games, even if the execution of the specific process is avoided, the number of games will still correspond to the correspondence information. If the specified process is exceeded, the specific process will no longer be executed, so there is no need to delete the information, unlike a configuration that stores information for executing the specific process, and the above can be achieved using a relatively simple configuration. It is possible to realize innovative gameplay.

Feature C2. When execution of the specific process is avoided by the avoidance means, the correspondence information set in the determination area is maintained, and the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means corresponds to the correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein execution of the specific processing by the specific processing execution means is avoided even after the number of games exceeds the number of games.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where execution of the specific process is avoided when the number of games reaches a specific number, the correspondence information set in the determination area is maintained as is (not deleted), and thereafter It is made clear that the specific processing is not performed even in the game.

Feature C3. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, the gaming state can be changed to a special one that can be continued over a plurality of games. a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101),
The special state is a state included in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein each game in the special state is a game in which the specific operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the transition symbol combination stops when the transition result is won, the transition to a special state as a so-called bonus state occurs, and each game in the special state is a game in which a specific operation is performed. If a specific number is reached during the special state, execution of the specific process will be avoided. By doing this, if a transition result is won before reaching a specific number, whether or not to cause a transition to a special state can be determined based on the number of games played up to the specific number and the advantage of the specific process. (Whether there is a need for avoidance or not) can be judged, making it possible to make the game more interesting.

Feature C4. The expected increase number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the gaming value awarded by the gaming value assigning means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, is increased by shifting to the special state. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the gaming machine is set to have a larger number of players than the previous state.

According to the above configuration, by transitioning to the special state, the expected number of increases, which is the average value per game of subtracting the gaming value awarded and the number of bets set, increases, so a specific trigger occurs. After that, from the perspective of increasing or losing the game value in the game up to the specific number, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game up to the specific number in the special state. On the other hand, as mentioned above, since the execution of specific processing is avoided in the special state, the transition to the special state is determined based on the relationship between the increase/loss of gaming value up to a certain number and whether or not the specific processing is executed. This makes it possible for the player to decide whether or not to play the game, increasing the number of things the player has to consider, and making the game more interesting.

Feature C5. The special state includes a first special state in which the number of consecutive games can be greater than the number of games played from the time the specific opportunity occurs until the number reaches the specific number; and The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, characterized in that a second special state is set in which the number of games can be less than the number of games played.

According to the above configuration, if the transition is made to the first special state after a specific opportunity occurs, execution of the specific process is avoided regardless of the number of games played up to the specific number at the time of the transition, and the transition is made to the second special state. In this case, execution of the specific process may or may not be avoided depending on the number of games played up to the specific number at the time of transition. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to consider whether or not to transfer to the special state based on the relationship with the advantage of the specific process, including the type of special state to be transferred.

Feature C6. The specific processing execution means is
a first specific processing execution means (a function for executing specific add-on processing by the main control device 101) that executes a first specific processing that causes a first event advantageous to the player as the specific processing;
A second specific processing execution means (for subtraction by the main controller 101) that executes a second specific processing that causes a second event that is disadvantageous to the player or less advantageous to the player than the first event as the specific processing. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the specific processing includes the first specific processing and the second specific processing that respectively cause the first event and the second event that have different degrees of advantage for the player, Allowing the player to select each game by a specific operation according to his or her will, such as not allowing the game to be avoided when the first specifying process is performed on the player's side, and causing the game to be avoided when the second specifying process is performed on the disadvantageous side. It is possible to realize such gameplay. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize interesting gameplay using specific processing that can be executed by setting correspondence information in the determination area.

Feature C7. When the specific opportunity occurs, in the specific game, a plurality of specific processing including the first specific processing by the first specific processing execution means and the second specific processing by the second specific processing execution means A configuration in which any one of the specified processes is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the avoidance means is configured to avoid execution of any of the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, it is determined whether to execute the advantageous first specific process or the disadvantageous second specific process, and when a specific operation is performed in a specific game. In this case, execution of the specific process is avoided regardless of which specific process is performed. By doing this, you can judge which specific process is set, and if the disadvantageous specific process is set, or if there is a high possibility that it is, then , it is possible to realize a thrilling gameplay in which execution of a specific process is avoided, and if a specific process on an advantageous side is set, or if the possibility is high, the specific process is executed. .

Feature C8. comprising means for storing specific information (for example, a specific additional winning flag) corresponding to the type of specific processing to be executed in the specific game when the specific opportunity occurs;
According to feature C6 or feature C7, the correspondence information setting means is configured to set common correspondence information in the determination area regardless of the type of specific processing executed in the specific game. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, by using the specific information corresponding to the type of specific processing, it is not necessary to vary the correspondence information set in the determination area depending on the type of specific processing, and the determination area can be made common. Can be done.

Feature C9. When the specific process occurs, it is equipped with a suggestion notification means (a function for executing a suggestion effect by the display control device 81) that can execute a suggestion notification corresponding to the type of specific process to be executed in the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C8.

According to the above configuration, it can be determined from the suggestion notification whether or not to perform a specific operation in a specific game to avoid execution of the specific process. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a gameplay in which the content of a specific process is predicted and it is determined whether or not to avoid execution of the specific process.

Feature C10. The first specific processing execution means executes, as the first specific processing, processing to increase the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state;
The game according to any one of features C6 to C9, wherein the second specific processing execution means executes, as the second specific processing, a subtraction process for subtracting the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, as the specific processing, when the first specific processing is performed, the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is added, and when the second specific processing is performed, the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is increased. is subtracted. With such a configuration, the player determines whether the first specific process or the second specific process will be performed in an advantageous state and selects whether or not to avoid execution of the specific process. By using such a configuration, it is possible to realize innovative gaming features such as how to continue an advantageous state (increase the number of games rather than decrease them). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the invention described in features C1 to C10 above is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of features C1 to C10 above, the technical characteristics shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is also possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means (the main controller 101 executes a lottery process) that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a bonus to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a gaming value imparting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that imparts a predetermined number of gaming values as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
An advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed,
Advantageous transition means (a function for executing AT start processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state when a predetermined transition trigger occurs;
Advantage ending means (a function for executing AT end processing by the main control device 101) for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state when the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state is played;
In the specific game in the advantageous state, execution of a specific process that is either an addition process for the number of games playable in the advantageous state or a subtraction process for subtracting the number of games playable in the advantageous state. means (a function for executing specific addition processing or subtraction processing by the main controller 101);
In the specific game, an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the specific process based on a specific operation by a player (a function to avoid a specific addition process or subtraction process by the main controller 101 based on a bet number that is not a specific prescribed number);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and the expectation is created for the transition to the advantageous state. You can play games while playing the game. Moreover, in this gaming machine, in a specific game in an advantageous state, either an addition process or a subtraction process for the number of games played may be performed. Therefore, if the addition process is performed, the advantageous state will continue for a longer time, but if the subtraction process is performed, the advantageous state may end earlier.As a player, depending on which process is performed, The exact opposite effect occurs, and it becomes possible to draw a high level of interest to which process is performed.

Moreover, in a specific game where the above-mentioned addition processing or subtraction processing is performed, it is possible to avoid execution of the addition processing or subtraction processing based on a specific operation by the player. If the player feels that there is a high possibility of a higher risk, they will perform a specific operation, but if they feel that there is a high possibility of additional processing, they will not perform a specific operation. It becomes possible to realize a more interesting game.

Note that the "subtraction process" may be expressed as "a subtraction process in which the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state is subtracted by more than the number of games executed in the advantageous state."

Feature D2. In a game before the specific game, a content lottery means (a function for executing a specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing of the content drawn by the content lottery means in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, whether to perform addition processing or subtraction processing as a specific process is determined in a game before the specific game, so even if you try to perform a specific operation in a specific game, it will not be in time. , etc. will not occur, and the gameplay of feature D1 can be suitably realized.

Feature D3. Equipped with bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game based on a player's operation,
The avoidance means allows execution of the specific process in the specific game by setting the number of bets by the number of bets setting means to a specific number according to the game state in the specific game, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means The game according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the specific operation is to set the number of bets to a number different from the specific number depending on the gaming state, and avoids execution of the specific process in the specific game. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the addition process or the subtraction process is executed or avoided based on the number of bets, so it is possible to avoid these processes with a relatively easy operation. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which execution of a specific process cannot be avoided due to the difficulty of the specific operation even though the execution of the specific process is desired to be avoided.

Feature D4. The mode notification means can execute the mode notification in a game for which the specific number of bets has been set by the bet number setting means, and when the bet number setting means has set a number of bets different from the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that execution of the mode notification is not possible in the set game.

According to the above configuration, by combining the number of bets at which the execution of the specific process is permitted or avoided with the number of bets at which the execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is permitted or restricted, the execution of the specific process is The affinity between presence/absence and mode notification is increased and it becomes easier to be accepted by players, and for example, the number of games for which addition processing or subtraction processing is to be performed is determined based on the presence/absence of mode notification and its mode. is also possible.

Feature D5. In a game before the specific game, a content lottery means (a function for executing a specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process,
The specific processing execution means is configured to execute the specific processing of the content drawn by the content lottery means in the specific game,
The content lottery means is characterized in that, after the specific processing is executed by the specific processing execution means, it is possible to draw a lottery for a specific game to execute the next specific processing and the content of the specific processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to the above configuration, the specific processing is performed periodically in an advantageous state, and even if the subtraction processing is performed in one specific game, the number of games will be increased by the addition processing in the next specific game. Since there is a possibility that the player will be revived, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game while the player is in an advantageous state.

Feature D6. After the specific processing is executed by the specific processing execution means, the number of games until the next specific game in which the specific processing is executed is the maximum increased number of games when the additional processing is performed as the specific processing and the The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the number of games is set to be smaller than the maximum number of subtracted games when the subtraction process is performed as the specific process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably expect the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game in feature D5.

Feature D7. Equipped with bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game based on a player's operation,
The avoidance means allows execution of the specific process in the specific game by setting the number of bets by the number of bets setting means to a specific number according to the game state in the specific game, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means The specific operation is to set the number of bets to a number different from the specific number according to the gaming state, and is configured to avoid execution of the specific process in the specific game,
The content lottery means draws the content of the specific process in a game in which the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is set to the specific number according to the gaming state, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is set to the specific number according to the gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or feature D6, characterized in that a lottery of the content of the specific processing is not executed in a game where the number is different from the specific number corresponding to the specific number.

According to the above configuration, by matching the lottery for the content of the specific process with whether or not the specific process is executed, it is possible to prevent the content of the next specific process from being determined even though the specific process has been performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the content of the next specific process is determined even though the specific process is not performed or the specific process is not performed.

Feature D8. When execution of the specific process is avoided by the avoidance unit, the content lottery means next selects the content of the specific process in a game to be executed with a number of bets that are the specific number according to the gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D7, which draws a lottery.

According to the above configuration, when execution of the specific process is avoided, the next specific process is drawn by lottery in a game with a specific number of bets. By doing this, in a configuration in which the execution of the specific process is avoided depending on the number of bets, and the lottery for the content of the specific process is not performed with the number of bets that avoid the execution of the specific process, the specific process is avoided. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of having difficulty determining the content of the next specific process even though execution has been avoided.

Feature D9. In a game before the specific game, a content lottery means (a function for executing a specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process,
The specific processing execution means is configured to execute the specific processing of the content drawn by the content lottery means in the specific game,
In a game after a lottery is drawn by the content lottery means and before the specific process is executed, a predetermined notification means can make a suggestion notification indicating a lottery result by the content lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a suggestion notification means (a function of executing processing for performing a suggestion effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it can be determined from the suggestion notification whether or not to perform a specific operation in a specific game to avoid execution of the specific process. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a gameplay in which the content of a specific process is predicted and it is determined whether or not to avoid execution of the specific process.

Note that the invention described in features D1 to D9 above is based on ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of features D1 to D9 above, the technical characteristics shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is also possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means (the main controller 101 executes a lottery process) that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a bonus to a player according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a gaming value imparting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that imparts a predetermined number of gaming values as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means wins a prize in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by operating in an operation mode is set;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed,
comprising a game number grasping means (number of advantageous period games AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
At least a first game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and execution of the specific process by the specific process execution device are permitted (a game with a specified prescribed number of bets depending on the gaming state); a second game in which execution of the specific process by the mode notification and the specific process execution means is restricted (a game with a bet number other than the specified specified number according to the gaming state);
is set,
The number of games grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
The expected increase number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the gaming value awarded by the gaming value assigning means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, is greater than the second game than the first game. The game is set to be more expensive,
In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, the planned number of games for which the specific process related to the mode notification (specific process related to the instruction function) by the mode notification means is executed. , a correspondence information setting means that sets the correspondence information in a predetermined determination area (for example, the AT start determination area) (for example, a function that executes a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101, etc.) )and,
Specifying that the specific processing can be executed when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches a specific number as the planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area. Processing execution means (a function of the main controller 101 to execute processing for starting AT mode, processing for ending CZ mode, processing for ending specialized zone, etc.);
At least after the specific opportunity occurs, the predetermined game until the number of games ascertained by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number is played in the first game more than in the case where the predetermined game is played in the second game. specifying means (means for setting a specialized zone based on the AT mode transition winning by the main controller 101) that can make it more advantageous for the player if
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the mode of the stop operation may be notified by the predetermined notification means, so that the mode notification is performed according to the mode notification. By having the player perform the operations, it becomes possible to provide different benefits to the player. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and the expectation is created for the transition to the advantageous state. You can play games while playing the game. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when a specific opportunity occurs in an advantageous state, correspondence information is set in the determination area so that when the number of games in the advantageous state reaches a specific number, specific processing regarding mode notification is executed. Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific process is subsequently executed based on a specific trigger, there is no need to remember that a specific trigger has occurred until the specific process is executed; The number of games grasping means can be used to determine whether the situation has occurred after a certain event has occurred, that the situation is after a specific opportunity has occurred but before executing a specific process, or that the situation is such that a specific process should be executed. It becomes possible to make a judgment only based on the number of games to be grasped and the correspondence information of the judgment area, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, in this gaming machine, since a first game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing is permitted and a second game in which mode notification and execution of specific processing are restricted, for example, Depending on the progress of the game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game as designed using the mode notification, such as switching to the second game in a situation where the mode notification should not be performed.

However, while the number of games played in an advantageous state is grasped by the number of games grasping means, the number of games grasping means is configured to grasp the number of games including both the first game and the second game. Furthermore, the expected increase in number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value awarded by the game value granting means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means, is greater in the second game than in the first game. Since the game is set to be higher than the first game, there is a possibility that the game after the specific opportunity occurs until the specific process is executed will be played in the second game instead of the first game. .

In this case, for example, if a configuration is configured in which a performance is performed such that the first game progresses but the second game does not progress after a specific opportunity occurs until a specific process is performed, the second game is played. There may be a gap between the execution timing of the specific process and the end timing of the performance, and for example, in a configuration that assists in winning a transition combination that changes the gaming state by mode notification, the specific process may be delayed due to the second game being played. Circumstances may arise that make it difficult to shift to the desired gaming state.

Therefore, by providing a specifying means that makes the first game more advantageous for the player than the second game so as to include at least a predetermined game in which a specific process is performed after a specific opportunity occurs, the second game can be executed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by playing the second game as described above.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the specifying means is set so that the predetermined game is more advantageous to the player than the game before the specific opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, by making the games that are advantageous more limited, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the second game without increasing the degree of advantage for the player too much. In particular, by making it more advantageous than before the specific opportunity, it becomes possible to motivate people not to play in the second game when the specific opportunity occurs, and the effect of feature E1 is further enhanced. be enhanced.

Feature E3. It is equipped with an advantage determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination of causing an advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous for the player,
The specific trigger is that the result of an advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event;
If the result of an advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, at least if the result of the advantageous determination is the corresponding result, it corresponds to the specific number for which the specific process is executed. A second specifying means (main control means) capable of making it more advantageous for the player when playing the first game than when playing the second game. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for setting the CZ mode based on the fact that the device 101 does not win the AT mode transition.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration where a specific opportunity is generated by winning in an advantageous determination, and it is more advantageous to play the predetermined game up to the specific determination in the first game, even if the player does not win in the advantageous determination. It is more advantageous to play the first game. Therefore, for example, assuming that the player does not know the result of an advantageous determination until a specific process is performed, after an advantageous determination is made regardless of the result of the advantageous determination, it is better to play the second game than to play the second game. Since it is more advantageous for the player to play the first game, it is possible to motivate the player not to play the second game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the result of the advantageous determination becomes completely obvious due to the fact that there is no deviation in performance or transition of the game state.

Feature E4. When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, the second specifying means shifts to a high advantageous state in which the result of the favorable determination by the advantageous determining means is likely to become the corresponding result. (a function for executing the transition process to the CZ mode by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is executed in the first game, but not in the second game.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E3, and by having the above configuration, a configuration in which the result of an advantageous judgment shifts to a high advantageous state as a so-called chance zone where the result of an advantageous judgment is likely to become a corresponding result, or a configuration in which an advantageous judgment is the first It is possible to successfully expect the effect of feature E3 while utilizing the existing configuration, such as being executed in the game but not in the second game.

Feature E5. A predetermined notification is started based on a predetermined advantageous judgment made by the advantageous judgment means, and the predetermined notification is made to notify a result corresponding to the result of the predetermined advantageous judgment made by the advantageous judgment means in the game that reaches the specific number of games. special notification means (a function to execute processing for performing continuous production by the display control device 81);
A situation in which the result of the predetermined favorable judgment by the advantageous judgment means that triggered the execution of the special notification by the special notification means is the non-compliant result, and the predetermined notification is made by the special notification means. If the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means made in is the corresponding result, the result notification corresponding to the corresponding result is performed in the game in which the result is notified in the special notification being executed. (a function that executes a process of setting a precursor flag when a precursor command is received during continuous performance based on a pseudo precursor performance table by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which special notification is performed as a so-called continuous performance in which a predetermined notification is triggered by an advantageous judgment and a result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment is executed, the special notification is Even if the triggering advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result, if the advantageous judgment during the special notification results in a corresponding result, only the contents are changed without changing the game for which the result is announced. By doing so, the degree of attention to the advantageous determination can be increased through special notification, and the result of the advantageous determination is less likely to be determined midway through. Therefore, after the specific trigger, the games up to the specific number are difficult to be played in the second game.

Feature E6. a first advantageous determination means (a function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that executes a first advantageous determination of causing a first advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous to the player;
After the first advantageous event occurs, a second advantageous determination is made to cause a second advantageous event (AT addition) that is different from the first advantageous event and is advantageous to the player. Advantage determining means (a function for executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the first advantageous event,
The specifying means causes the second advantageous judgment result by the second advantageous judgment means to shift to a high advantageous state (specialization zone) in which the result of the second advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means is likely to be a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the second advantageous event, and the The game according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the second advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is performed in the first game, but not in the second game. Machine.

According to the above configuration, after winning the first advantageous determination, the state shifts to a high advantageous state in which the probability of winning the second advantageous determination increases, and the second advantageous determination is not performed in the second game, so that the specified It is more advantageous to play the predetermined game in the first game until the processing is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to motivate the player not to play the second game with a relatively simple configuration such as a change in the probability of the second advantageous determination and whether or not the second advantageous determination is executed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the result of the advantageous determination becomes completely obvious due to the fact that there is no deviation in performance or transition of the game state.

Feature E7. It is equipped with an advantage determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that executes an advantage determination of causing an advantageous event (transition to AT mode) that is advantageous for the player,
The specific trigger is that the result of an advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a corresponding result that corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event;
When the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, a second specifying process (CZ mode A second correspondence information setting means (setting the number of games in the specific determination area by the main control device 101) sets the planned number of games to be executed (end processing) as correspondence information in the determination area (specific start determination area). function to execute processing, etc.), and
If the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number, and the trigger for setting the correspondence information set in the determination area is the non-correspondence result, a second specific processing execution means (a function executed by the main controller 101 to execute processing for ending the CZ mode) capable of executing the second specific processing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which when the favorable determination is won, the corresponding information is set in the determination area and the specific process is executed when a specific number is reached, even if the favorable determination is not won, the instruction function The configuration is such that the second specific process is executed, and the execution timing is determined using a configuration that sets correspondence information in the determination area for the second specific process as well. Through sharing, the processing configuration can be simplified when executing multiple types of processing that have a common execution trigger.

Feature E8. Means capable of grasping the correspondence information set in the judgment area before the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number (for judgment by the main controller 101) Features E1 to E7 described in any one of features E1 to E7 include a function of executing a process of determining that the game is the previous game of the game corresponding to the number of games set in the information storage area 106f. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, since it becomes possible to know before the specific number is reached, the extensibility of the process is greatly improved, for example, by providing advance notification that the specific process will be performed. Therefore, while simplifying the processing configuration using the determination area, it is possible to easily apply the process to game progress processing and performance processing.

Feature E9. The specific processing execution means is configured to perform the specific processing execution means, when a game in which the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means reaches the specific number is executed in the second game, even if the first game is played thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured not to execute the specific process that becomes executable when a specific number is reached.

According to the above configuration, if the number of games that have reached a specific number is played in the second game, the specific process will not be executed. In order to avoid being exhausted in the second game, it is thought that no games will be played in the second game, including games up to a specific number. Therefore, inconveniences caused by playing the second game can be suitably avoided.

Feature E10. When the specific opportunity occurs, a scheduled number of games selection means for selecting one scheduled number of games from a plurality of types of scheduled number of games set (executes processing for setting the number of precursor games by the main controller 101) function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the correspondence information setting means is configured to set the correspondence information according to the planned number of games selected by the planned number of games selection means. .

According to the above configuration, after a specific opportunity occurs, it becomes difficult to understand the game in which the specific process is executed. It is conceivable that players will no longer play the second game, including games. Therefore, inconveniences caused by playing the second game can be suitably avoided.

Note that the invention described in features E1 to E10 above is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There is a known configuration in which an internal lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, with regard to slot machines, the slot machine starts when medals are bet as gaming media. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating, and if the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reels stop. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E10, the technical characteristics shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is also possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature E groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature E groups detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding benefits to players based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position where the symbols are visible through the display section, and A means that can grant benefits corresponding to the results,
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which the first symbol combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode; a second result that enables a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination to be stopped at the predetermined position when the operation is performed in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode; death,
comprising a mode notification means capable of performing mode notification regarding the operation modes including the first operation mode and the second operation mode using a predetermined notification means;
A specific state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed is set,
a grasping means for grasping information corresponding to the number of games played in the specific state;
When a predetermined specific opportunity occurs, information corresponding to the scheduled number of games for which specific processing regarding the mode notification by the mode notification means is to be executed in the specific state is settable in a predetermined specific area. 1 means and
a second means capable of executing the specific processing when the information grasped by the grasping means corresponds to the information set by the first means;
If the scheduled number of games set when the specific opportunity occurs is a first number, a third means capable of executing a first notification based on the specific opportunity;
If the scheduled number of games set when the specific opportunity occurs is a second number, a fourth means capable of executing a second notification based on the specific opportunity;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the specific opportunity occurs, the specific process may be performed in a game with a different number of games than the scheduled number of games .

Images